JP6401950B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, an operation reception period for enabling operation input of an operation switch is provided as a predetermined period before winning a big hit and a big hit game is started, and a display unit is displayed during the operation reception period. A BGM selection menu is displayed. When the player operates the operation switch and selects one of a plurality of BGMs included in the BGM selection menu, the selected BGM is reproduced during the big hit game (for example, Patent Document 1). .

  Further, when the BGM selection menu is displayed, if a new BGM type is added, the BGM selection menu is displayed in a state where the new BGM is selected. If there is no operation by the player's selection switch, the newly added BGM is determined as being selected and played in the big hit game (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2007-202938 A JP 2010-259465 A

  Here, the selection of BGM is executed in a period prepared in advance before the big hit game, and the information used for selecting the BGM when the big hit game ends and the special symbol variation display is started. It was erased from memory. This is to prevent the wrong effect from being executed due to the malfunction when the information about the effect that has been performed so far is held at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

  However, when the BGM is selected, if the display of the special symbol is changed over a plurality of times, the selection of the BGM is stopped halfway or the selection work by the player is reset at the start. Further, when the BGM is interrupted before the BGM is changed after the selection of the BGM, no countermeasure is taken against a malfunction in the next selection of the BGM.

The present invention is, without imparting a sense of discomfort to the player, it is an object of the present invention to provide a technique capable of suppressing the lowering of interest.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution performs a predetermined lottery (internal lottery) when a lottery trigger occurs (when the operating memory stored by winning a prize-winning slot related to a special symbol is consumed) during the game. When the predetermined lottery is executed, and when the predetermined lottery is executed, the symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbol is displayed in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. The symbol display means for stopping display (determination stop) and the variable display effect for variably displaying a plurality of effect symbols corresponding to the symbol variable display each time by the symbol display means are executed, and then the variable display is finished. An effect symbol effect executing means for executing a result display effect for stopping and displaying a plurality of effect symbols in a combination corresponding to the stop display of symbols, and a plurality of symbol changes executed by the symbol display means. A background effect executing means for executing a background effect (reproduction of BGM (background music)) different from the effect by the effect symbol effect executing means across the display and the stop display, and an operation input (button pressing) Based on the reception, the background effect type selecting means that allows the background effect executed by the background effect executing means to be selected from a plurality of predefined types, and the symbol display by the symbol display means during variable display or stop display The selection of the plurality of types of background effects is triggered by the fact that the operation input is received by the background effect type selection means (when a predetermined condition (a state where BGM can be changed) is satisfied) Background effect information display means for displaying background effect selection information on the background effect type selection means in the state where the background effect selection information is displayed When a predetermined standby time has elapsed since the operation input is received, the background effect is changed to the background effect of the type selected corresponding to the accepted operation input, and the background effect executing means is notified of the background. Corresponding to the background effect change control means for controlling the execution of the effect, the current effect information indicating the type of the background effect currently being executed by the background effect executing means, and the operation input by the background effect type selecting means The background effect executing means executes internal information storage means for storing internal information including at least selected effect information indicating the type of background effect selected, and the internal information stored by the internal information storage means. When the background effect type is changed, the current effect information is updated to the changed background effect type while the background effect is changed. By the internal information storage update means for updating the selected effect information to the type of the background effect that is scheduled to be changed when the operation input whose type has been changed is accepted, and the background effect change control means When the display of the background effect selection information is not displayed before the standby time elapses, the background effect change control unit by the background effect change control unit maintains the internal information updated by the internal information storage update unit. When the operation input by the background effect type selection unit is accepted in a state in which the background effect selection information is not displayed, and the background effect change control stop unit for stopping the control for changing the background effect, the internal information storage If the current presentation information stored in the internal information stored by the means is different from the selection presentation information, the selection presentation information is changed to the current presentation information. An internal information storage changing means for changing the effect information, a game machine characterized by comprising a.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) When a lottery opportunity occurs during a game (a game ball enters a start winning opening), an internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed. For this reason, the player plays a game with the goal of causing the game ball to enter the start winning opening that becomes the lottery opportunity. Moreover, the start winning opening is provided with a first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening, and a lottery opportunity is generated corresponding to each. When the internal lottery corresponds to the winning, the winning type is also drawn and determined.

(2) When the internal lottery of (1) is executed, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery. It takes a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) from the start of the symbol display to the stop display. Once the symbol display is started, the stop display is completed. The next internal lottery will not be held until When the internal lottery corresponding to the first lottery opportunity is performed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the internal lottery corresponding to the second lottery trigger is performed, the second special symbol is different from the first special symbol. Special symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

(3) When the result of the internal lottery in (1) corresponds to winning, and a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner according to (2), a special game (big hit game) is executed. The player can obtain a certain amount of profits (outing) by this special game.

(4) In addition, during the special symbol fluctuation display, an effect that makes it possible to expect a big hit is executed. For example, a variable display effect and a stop display effect with three effect symbols are performed in the liquid crystal display. As a result, if all the effect symbols are stopped at the same type (for example, 7-7-7), it becomes a big hit and different. When stopping at the type (for example, 7-5-3), it is off. Reach production is performed during the fluctuating display production, raising the expectation for the big hit.

(5) When the change display effect and the stop display effect of (4) above are performed, BGM that excites the effect is output from the gaming machine. In addition, a plurality of types of BGM are prepared and are appropriately reproduced in accordance with the production.

(6) Then, in the state where the reproduced BGM of (5) above can be changed, when an operation (button press) by the player is accepted, BGM selection for assisting to change the BGM is selected. The interface is displayed in the liquid crystal display. If a button press is detected when the BGM selection interface is not displayed, the BGM selection interface is displayed. If a button press is detected while the BGM selection interface is displayed, the type of BGM can be changed. .

(7) After a certain amount of waiting time has elapsed since the player changed the BGM type in (6) above, it is changed to the selected BGM and played.

(8) The internal information including the current BGM information indicating the type of BGM currently being executed and the selected BGM information indicating the type of BGM selected by the player through the BGM selection interface is stored in a memory (for example, RAM). ) Is stored.

(9) Regarding the internal information of (8) above, when the BGM is changed, the current BGM information is changed corresponding to the type of the changed BGM, and the selected BGM information is selected by the player through the BGM selection interface. That is, the selection BGM information is changed in accordance with the type selected by the player when the player's operation (button press) is accepted. Therefore, when the BGM change of (7) is performed, it indicates that the current BGM information and the selected BGM information are the same.

(10) Here, the BGM selection is performed during the waiting time from when the player changes the BGM type in (6) above until the BGM selected in (7) above is played back. When the interface is hidden, the BGM is not changed in (7) while the internal information in (9) is maintained in that state. Therefore, it represents that the current BGM information and the selected BGM information of the internal information remain different. That is, since the current BGM information is different from the selected BGM information, the BGM change is performed when the player operates the next time to display the BGM selection interface even though the player has not selected the BGM. Malfunction may occur.

(11) However, if the BGM selection interface is displayed again in the liquid crystal display by the player's operation from the state in which the BGM selection interface is not displayed, the current BGM information and the selected BGM information of the internal information are confirmed and are different. If it is, it will be changed to the current BGM information, and both will be the same.

  In this way, even if irregularity occurs during the BGM change, it is possible to avoid a malfunction such as a BGM change even if the subsequent player has not selected the BGM. BGM can be changed accurately without giving a sense of incongruity, and a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

  Solution means 2: The gaming machine of the present solution means, in solution means 1, effect content storage means for storing effect contents of the variable display effect and the result display effect executed by the effect symbol effect execution means, and the background The background effect selection information content storage means for storing the content of the background effect selection information displayed by the effect information display means, and the effect symbol effect execution means for the effect content storage means based on the effect content stored by the effect content storage means. Control for causing the background effect information display means to execute display of the background effect selection information based on the contents stored by the background effect selection information content storage means for executing the variable display effect and the result display effect. The production control means to perform and the production by the production symbol production execution means triggered by the execution of the predetermined lottery When the dynamic display effect is started, the effect contents of the variable display effect and the result display effect stored by the effect content storage unit are updated, while the background effect selection information is not displayed. When the background effect selection information is displayed by the background effect information display means upon receipt of the operation input by the background effect type selection means, the background effect stored in the background effect selection information content storage means A gaming machine further comprising storage update means for updating the content of the selection information.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(12) Information on effects performed in the liquid crystal display is temporarily stored individually in a memory (for example, RAM) in the gaming machine, and effects are performed based on the stored information. For example, information related to the variable display effect and stop display effect based on the effect symbol is stored in the effect buffer, information related to the BGM selection interface is stored in the BGM selection buffer, and internal information is further stored in another buffer.

(13) Here, for each piece of information stored in the memory of (12) above, information related to the variable display effect and stop display effect stored in the effect buffer is updated at the time of starting the variable symbol display of the special symbol. In this example, the previous information is cleared (erased), and the current information is created and stored. On the other hand, the information related to the BGM selection interface stored in the BGM selection buffer is updated when the button is pressed when the BGM selection interface is displayed. Specifically, the information regarding the BGM selection interface is new when nothing is stored in the buffer. Create and store information. Further, when a predetermined time (about 5 seconds) elapses while the BGM selection interface is displayed, the information related to the BGM selection interface stored in the BGM selection buffer is deleted.

  In this way, the timing for updating (creating and storing) the BGM selection buffer related to the BGM selection interface (when the BGM selection interface is displayed) and the effect buffer related to the effect corresponding to one change are updated (created and stored after clearing). The timing (when the special symbol starts to change) is different. Therefore, this means that the BGM selection interface is not initialized every time a special symbol change is made, and the player cannot change the BGM until the special symbol change ends (until the next change starts). It is not necessary to end the selection, and a desired BGM can be selected (changed) over time on the BGM selection interface. In other words, even if a special symbol is straddled a plurality of times, the BGM can be changed without a sense of incongruity.

  Solution means 3: The gaming machine of the present solution means that in the solution means 1 or 2, the background effect information display means is a fluctuation corresponding to a time when the symbol fluctuation display executed by the symbol display means is longer than usual. A gaming machine characterized in that the background effect selection information is not displayed when a special effect is being executed during the variable display effect executed by the effect symbol effect executing means. It is.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
The reason why the BGM selection interface of (10) is not displayed is that the special symbol variation display is performed over a variation time longer than usual, and a special effect is executed during the variation time. .

  As described above, when a BGM is selected by the player and a special effect is subsequently executed, the BGM selection interface is hidden, and accordingly, the BGM change is also canceled. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the special performance without being hidden by the BGM selection interface, and the BGM is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Solution means 4: The gaming machine of the present solution means that in the solution means 2 or 3, the storage update means is updated when the background effect selection information is displayed. A gaming machine that is updated based on at least the current performance information included in the internal information stored in an information storage means.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
The information regarding the BGM selection interface stored in the BGM selection buffer in (12) is created based on the current BGM information (the type of BGM currently being executed) of the internal information.

  Solving means 5: The gaming machine of the present solving means is the solving means 3 or 4, wherein the storage updating means is configured to store the selection area reserved by the background effect selection information content storage area securing means. When the background effect information is not displayed by the information display means, the content of the background effect selection information stored in the selection area is erased.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
The information stored in the BGM selection buffer is cleared (erased) along with the non-display of the BGM selection interface. That is, when the BGM selection interface is displayed, the information related to the BGM selection interface stored in the BGM selection buffer is updated. This means that nothing is stored after the information related to the BGM selection interface is newly created. This indicates that the created information is stored in a BGM selection buffer that has not been set.

  As described above, the timing for clearing the BGM selection buffer relating to the BGM selection interface (when the BGM selection interface is not displayed), the timing for storing (when the BGM selection interface is displayed), and the effect buffer relating to the effect corresponding to one change are stored after being cleared. The timing (when the special symbol starts to change) is different. Therefore, this means that the BGM selection interface is not initialized every time a special symbol change is made, and the player cannot change the BGM until the special symbol change ends (until the next change starts). It is not necessary to end the selection, and a desired BGM can be selected (changed) over time on the BGM selection interface. In other words, even if a special symbol is straddled a plurality of times, the BGM can be changed without a sense of incongruity.

According to the present invention, without imparting a sense of discomfort to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease of the interest.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is the perspective view which showed the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus and its periphery from the diagonally upper left on the front side. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball | bowl enters into the 2nd variable prize apparatus currently open | released, and a game ball does not pass through a probability change area | region. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball | bowl enters into the 2nd variable prize apparatus currently open | released, and a game ball | bowl passes a probability change area | region. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball passes through the upper part of the 2nd variable prize apparatus during closure. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a figure which shows an example of the big prize opening operation | movement regarding a winning symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a big win time variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening big opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning prize closing opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening / closing operation | movement process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1 (the 1). It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1 (the 2). It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1 (the 3). It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach production performed at the time of the big hit (winning) in the case of corresponding to "10 round symbol 1" or "10 round symbol 2" in a non-time shortening state. It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big-game production performed at the time of winning in normal mode (1/6). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed at the time of winning in the normal mode (2/6). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big-game production performed at the time of winning in the normal mode (3/6). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed at the time of winning in the normal mode (4/6). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big-game production performed at the time of winning in the normal mode (5/6). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big-game production performed at the time of winning in the normal mode (6/6). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production in battle mode partially (1/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production in battle mode partially (2/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production in battle mode partially (3/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production in battle mode partially (4/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production in battle mode partially (5/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production in battle mode partially (6/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production in battle mode partially (7/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production in battle mode partially (8/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production in battle mode partially (9/9). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the effect at the time of BGM change operation in battle mode (1/4). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the effect at the time of BGM change operation in battle mode (2/4). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the effect at the time of BGM change operation in battle mode (3/4). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the effect at the time of BGM change operation in battle mode (4/4). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of battle mode big hit effect pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a variable winning apparatus operation | movement pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of another process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect buffer clear processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a BGM selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a BGM interface display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an internal information confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a process during BGM interface display. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process at the time of scroll end. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the operation detection waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a process during an operation invalid period. It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart at the time of BGM selection (the 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart at the time of BGM selection (the 2).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable / closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or during the change of the symbol, the display of the big hit, or the like During the big hit game, some kind of effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.) can be generated.

  A cross key button 44 is provided adjacent to the effect switching button 45. The cross key button 44 is composed of, for example, four push buttons. Specifically, it is composed of an upper button 44a on the gaming machine side as viewed from the player, a right button 44b on the right side, a lower button 44c on the player side, and a left button 44d on the left side. The player can press the cross key button 44 and perform an operation to set a gaming environment or use it for an operation for inputting the player's personal data to the gaming machine. Even if the cross key button 44 is not used in the setting of the gaming environment, the setting of the gaming environment may be adjusted using the jog dial after the effect switching button 45 is pressed.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (not indicated by reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left part of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state), and the right part of the game area 8a is an advantageous game state (big hit game state) , A second game area (right-handed area) used in a small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, and the like. Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning apparatus are provided around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed. Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a, and the start gate 20, the variable start winning apparatus 28, and the second variable winning apparatus 31 are arranged in the right part of the game area 8a. ing. Further, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged from the right of the lower part of the game area 8a. Further, the two left normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the two right normal winning holes 24 are arranged in the right part of the game area 8a.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, or variable start at the time of operation. The player enters the winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, there is a possibility that game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the start gate 20, enter the variable start winning device 28 during operation, or enter the first variable winning device 30 during opening operation. There is a possibility that the player enters a ball, enters the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, or enters the normal winning port 24. The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device. The game balls that have entered the device 31 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (the board surface), when a game ball is to enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed) It is necessary to drive a game ball into the area (so-called “left-handed” is executed).

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to be placed in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning port 24, the right side region (right-handed region) in the game region 8a. ) To play a game ball (perform so-called “right-handed”).

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. It is possible to enter the right start winning opening 28a (predetermined winning opening: see FIG. 4) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, one open / close member 28b, and this open / close member 28b reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by a dotted line in FIG. 3, one open / close member 28b is in the closed position (closed position) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the right start winning opening 28a ( (There is no gap where game balls can enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the right start winning opening 28a is opened by expanding the opening width on the right side. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which a game ball can enter, and can enter the right start winning port 28a (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28a. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning port 28a at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a) at the time of the opening operation, and the balls are randomly generated.

  The first variable winning device 30 described above is a case where a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning) and a predetermined first condition ("5 round symbol 1" or Conditions from 1st to 3rd round when winning with "5 round symbol 2", 1st to 3rd round when winning with "10 round symbol 1" or "10 round symbol 2", or Operates when the conditions from the 6th to the 10th round, the conditions from the 1st to the 3rd round, or from the 6th to the 16th round when winning in the “16th round design” are met Then, it is possible to win the first big winning opening (no reference sign) (special electric accessory, first special winning event generating means).

  The first variable prize-winning device 30 is a device arranged on the lower right side of the rendering unit 40 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is always impossible to win the first big prize opening (the first big prize opening is closed). When the first variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower edge portion as a hinge, thereby opening the first big winning opening (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible, and can generate an event of winning a prize at the first big winning opening. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball to the first grand prize opening.

  The second variable winning device 31 is the same as the first variable winning device 30 when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode), and a predetermined second condition (“ 5 round symbol 1 ”,“ 5 round symbol 2 ”,“ 10 round symbol 1 ”,“ 10 round symbol 2 ”or“ 16 round symbol ”when winning the 4th or 5th round) It operates when it is satisfied, and allows the winning of a second big winning opening (specific winning opening: no reference sign) (special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the lower right of the effect unit 40 (so-called right attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The first variable winning device 30 employs a device in which the opening / closing member 30a is tilted forward. The second variable winning device 31 is a device in which the opening / closing member 31a is slid into the board surface. Adopted (slide type attacker). The opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by, for example, a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. Is impossible (the second big prize opening is closed). When the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is drawn into the board surface to open the second large winning opening (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and can generate an event of entering the second large winning opening.

[Probability change area (specific area)]
In addition, inside the second variable winning device 31, a probability variation area (no reference sign) is provided separately from the second large winning opening. The probability variation area is an area through which a game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and an area through which a game ball can pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state. Further, a probability variation area slide member 330 (see FIG. 6) for guiding a game ball to the probability variation area is disposed above the probability variation area, and the probability variation area slide member 330 is operated at a specific timing during the big hit game. Thus, it is possible to guide the game ball to the probability variation area. The probability variation area slide member 330 is a member operated by the probability variation area solenoid 99, and it is determined based on the operation pattern of the probability variation area solenoid 99 whether or not the game ball passes through the probability variation area. It becomes. For example, the operation pattern of the probability change region solenoid 99 during a specific round during the big hit game is in an operation state (the probability change region slide member 330 is in an open state) for a short time of 0.1 seconds from the start of the round, and thereafter It is set in such a mode that it is in an inoperative state (probability changing region slide member 330 is closed) for 5 seconds and then is in an operating state (probability changing region slide member 330 is open) for a long period of 24 seconds. When the round ends in the middle of the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99, the probability variation region solenoid 99 is deactivated.

[Winning equipment unit]
In the lower right part of the game board unit 8, a winning device unit 300 is arranged. The winning device unit 300 includes the second variable winning device 31 described above. The winning device unit 300 is formed with a special passage (see arrow B in FIG. 3) through which all game balls that have not entered the active variable start winning device 28 among the right-handed game balls pass. ing. Since the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the special passage, when the opening / closing member 31a slides and the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state, the special passage ( All the game balls passing through the arrow B in FIG. 3 enter the second variable winning device 31. Details of the winning device unit 300 will be described later.

  In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the center position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inner side. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the interior of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped ornament). The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

  In addition, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40k. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. In addition, the game area 8a including the game balls that have entered the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the right starting winning port 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are driven. All the game balls thus collected are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the second variable winning device 31 and its surroundings from the upper left oblique side on the front side. In the following drawings, the shape of the obstacle nail is shown as a cylindrical shape, but the actual obstacle nail is thinner than the flat hemispherical head and the head connected to the head. It is comprised with the cylindrical trunk | drum (shaft part).

A start gate 20 is disposed near the center of the second game area (right-handed area), and a variable start winning device 28 is disposed below the start gate 20. As described above, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is enlarged on the right side to open the right start winning port 28a.
In addition, a winning device unit 300 including the second variable winning device 31 is disposed below the variable start winning device 28.

  The winning device unit 300 includes a front cover 310, a flow path forming member 320, a second variable winning device 31, a second count switch 85, a probability variation region slide member 330, a probability variation region switch (not shown), and the like.

  The front cover 310 is made of a transparent resin material. For this reason, the player can visually recognize the inside of the front cover 310 in a state of being installed in the game board unit 8. Further, the front cover 310 has various decorations on the surface thereof in accordance with the effect mode of the gaming machine. The front cover 310 is fixedly attached to the flow path forming member 320 at a part on the back side.

The flow path forming member 320 is a member protruding forward of the game board unit 8, and a game ball rolls on the upper surface thereof.
The flow path forming member 320 has a receiving surface 321 formed on the most upstream side. The receiving surface 321 is a surface that receives a game ball that has dropped from above, and a curved surface 322 that extends downward following the receiving surface 321 is formed below the receiving surface 321.
The first inclined surface 323 is formed at the end of the bending of the curved surface 322, and the second inclined surface 324 is formed with the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31 interposed therebetween. .

  The second variable winning device 31 is a special electric accessory (a so-called slide-type V attacker) having a probability variation region inside. The opening / closing member 31 a of the second variable prize winning device 31 has a rear end portion entering the opening 31 c and a front end portion located between the first inclined surface 323 and the second inclined surface 324. As described above, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the function of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side. At this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. Cannot enter the ball (the second large winning opening 31b is closed). When the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is drawn into the opening 31c, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and can generate an event of entering the second large winning port 31b. It should be noted that all game balls that have not entered the active variable start winning device 28 among the right-handed game balls pass through the passage (route) including at least the first inclined surface 323 and the second inclined surface 324. The opening / closing member 31a of the second variable prize-winning device 31 is disposed on the special passage.

  Here, the opening width of the second grand prize winning opening 31b is a width indicated by an arrow A in the drawing when strictly grasped. That is, the opening width of the second big prize opening 31b is such that the left obstacle nail among the two obstacle nails arranged above the receiving surface 321 from the left end of the opening / closing member 31a (second big prize opening 31b). Up to. This is because all the game balls that have passed through the area indicated by the arrow A in the figure will enter the second big prize opening 31b as long as the second big prize opening 31b is open. However, the opening width of the second grand prize opening 31b does not necessarily need to be strictly grasped in this way. For example, the opening / closing member 31a (second big prize opening 31b) from the left end of the opening / closing member 31a (second big prize opening 31b). ) To the right end. In any case, in the present embodiment, an avoidance hole (a space for allowing a game ball to escape) is not formed around the opening of the second big winning opening 31b.

  A bottom surface 325 is formed on the bottom of the second big prize opening 31b to guide the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 31b downward, and a second count switch 85 is arranged below the bottom face 325. Has been. The second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 (second big prize opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

  A vertical passage 326 extending downward is formed downstream of the second count switch 85, and a movable space 327 of a tongue-shaped (velocity type) probability variation region slide member 330 is provided at the lower end of the vertical passage 326. It has been. In the state shown in the figure, the probability variation area slide member 330 is in a position retracted from the board surface (a retreat position), thereby making it impossible for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area. On the other hand, when the probability variation area slide member 330 moves to a position (drive position) that protrudes to the near side from the board surface, the probability variation area slide member 330 enters the movable space 327 and receives the game ball flowing down from above, The game ball is guided to a probability variation area (not shown) arranged inside.

  The probability variation area slide member 330 is a thin plate-like member that is inclined from the front end toward the rear end in order to guide the game ball to the back side, and a fall (not shown) that drops the game ball downward at the rear end portion. A hole is formed. When the game ball is guided to the inside by the probability variation region slide member 330, the game ball falls toward the probability variation region and then passes through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area, a probability variation area switch (not shown) detects that the game ball has passed the probability variation area. The game balls that have passed through the probability variation area are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. In the case where the second variable winning device 31 is provided with a discharge switch, the probability variation area switch can also be used as a discharge switch.

  A discharge passage 328 extending in the left direction in the figure is formed downstream of the movable space 327, and a discharge hole 329 is disposed at the tip of the discharge passage 328. The game balls that have dropped into the discharge hole 329 are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. A discharge switch (not shown) can be disposed at the tip of the discharge hole 329. When the second variable winning device 31 is provided with a discharge switch, by using such a discharge switch and the above-described count switch, it is determined whether or not the number of balls entered matches the number of discharges. Can do.

  Of the two normal winning holes 24 arranged in the second game area (right-handed area) of the game area 8a, the upper normal winning hole 24 is arranged between the obstacle nails, A game ball can be inserted in between. On the other hand, the lower normal winning opening 24 is disposed inside the lower left side of the winning apparatus unit 300, and allows a game ball to enter through an opening (no reference numeral) formed in the winning apparatus unit 300. .

  FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a game ball enters the open second variable winning device 31 and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area. In the following drawings, the front cover 310 disposed in the forefront of the winning device unit 300, the internal structure of the winning device unit 300, the normal winning port 24, and the like are appropriately omitted.

  When the big hit state occurs and the second variable winning device 31 digests the round game, the player executes the right hit to advance the big hit game. When the player performs a right strike, the game ball flows down along the right side of the game area and first contacts the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320. Depending on the course of the game ball, the curved surface 322 or the first inclined surface 323 may be contacted without contacting the receiving surface 321 (hereinafter the same).

  Since the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320 is inclined in the lower left direction, the game ball rolls in the lower left direction. Then, the game ball released from the receiving surface 321 passes through the curved surface 322 and enters the first inclined surface 323. Since the first inclined surface 323 is also inclined in the lower left direction, the game ball moves toward the second variable winning device 31.

  When the second variable winning device 31 is open, the opening / closing member 31a slides to open the second big winning port 31b, so that a game ball can be put into the second big winning port 31b. It becomes. In this state, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 31b, the game ball falls to the bottom surface 325 of the second big prize opening 31b. The game ball that has dropped onto the bottom surface 325 rolls in the lower left direction and falls downward from the left end of the bottom surface 325. The game ball that has dropped down is detected by the second count switch 85.

In the case of the 4th and 5th rounds when winning in “5 Round Symbol 1” or “10 Round Symbol 1”, the second big prize opening 31b is open for only a short time (0.1). Since the round also ends together with the closing of the second grand prize opening 31b, the probability variation area slide member 330 is not released when the round is finished, so that the second big prize winning opening 31b is reached within a short time (0.1 second). Even if a game ball enters, the game ball is not guided to an internal probability variation area.
Therefore, the game ball is not guided by the probability variation region slide member 330, passes through the vertical passage 326, proceeds to the discharge passage 328, and falls into the discharge hole 329.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a game ball enters the open second variable winning device 31 and the game ball passes through the probability variation area.

  When the big hit state occurs and the second variable winning device 31 digests the round game, the player executes the right hit to advance the big hit game. When the player performs a right strike, the game ball flows down along the right side of the game area and first contacts the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320.

  Since the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320 is inclined in the lower left direction, the game ball rolls in the lower left direction. Then, the game ball released from the receiving surface 321 passes through the curved surface 322 and enters the first inclined surface 323. Since the first inclined surface 323 is also inclined in the lower left direction, the game ball moves toward the second variable winning device 31.

  When the second variable winning device 31 is open, the opening / closing member 31a slides to open the second big winning port 31b, so that a game ball can be put into the second big winning port 31b. It becomes. In this state, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 31b, the game ball falls to the bottom surface 325 of the second big prize opening 31b. The game ball that has dropped onto the bottom surface 325 rolls in the lower left direction and falls downward from the left end of the bottom surface 325. The game ball that has dropped down is detected by the second count switch 85.

In the fourth and fifth rounds when winning the “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol”, the probability variation area slide member 330 projects to the front side from the board surface ( In the driving position), the game ball is guided to the probability variation area inside.
Therefore, the game ball is guided to the probability variation area slide member 330 and enters the inside of the board surface, and it is detected by the probability variation area switch (not shown) that the game ball has passed the probability variation area.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a game ball passes through the upper portion of the second variable winning device 31 that is closed.

  When the big hit state occurs and the second variable winning device 31 digests the round game, the player executes the right hit to advance the big hit game. When the player performs a right strike, the game ball flows down along the right side of the game area and first contacts the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320.

  Since the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320 is inclined in the lower left direction, the game ball rolls in the lower left direction. Then, the game ball released from the receiving surface 321 passes through the curved surface 322 and enters the first inclined surface 323. Since the first inclined surface 323 is also inclined in the lower left direction, the game ball moves toward the second variable winning device 31.

  When the second variable winning device 31 is closed, the opening / closing member 31a does not slide into the inside of the board surface, so that the second big winning port 31b is closed, and a game ball enters the second big winning port 31b. I can't. When the game ball reaches the opening / closing member 31a in this state, the game ball passes over the opening / closing member 31a and proceeds to the second inclined surface 324. Then, the game ball passes through the second inclined surface 324 and is released to the game area, and finally enters the normal winning opening 24 or enters the first variable winning device 30 being opened, It is collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, all the games other than the game balls collected on the back side of the game board unit 8 by entering the variable start winning device 28 in operation among the right-handed game balls. Since the second variable winning device 31 is arranged at the position where the ball passes, when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state, all the game balls that have passed through the side of the variable start winning device 28 are the first. 2 The player enters the variable winning device 31. For this reason, when the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 31 is an open state, a useless ball will not generate | occur | produce and it will give a player a sense of superiority, suppressing that a player's expectation will fall. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state, all the game balls other than the game balls collected on the back side of the game board unit 8 enter the second variable winning device 31. Therefore, an avoidance hole (a space for allowing the game ball to escape) is formed upstream or around the second variable prize-winning device 31, or a guide path for guiding the game ball that has entered the avoidance hole to the out port is formed. Therefore, it is possible to secure a wide gaming area.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning port 31b) is formed at the outer edge of the area into which the game ball can enter. For this reason, according to this embodiment, the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 31 can be put outside the game area. Then, by bringing the second variable winning device 31 to the outside of the game area, it is possible to secure a wider game area.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an avoidance hole that prevents the game ball from entering the second variable winning device 31 is not formed on the upstream or right side of the second variable winning device 31. For this reason, according to this embodiment, unless the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in the process of flowing down the right-handed area, the game ball is always directed to the second variable winning device 31. If the variable winning device 31 is in the open state, the game ball will surely enter the second large winning port 31b. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state, the useless ball is not generated, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation. Moreover, in this embodiment, since an avoidance hole is not formed, the space can be used for another use (placement space etc. of a decoration member).

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the sliding type opening / closing member 31a is adopted, the spilling of the game ball is less than that of an attacker in which the opening / closing member falls forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge. In addition, it is possible to show the player carefully how the game ball enters the winning opening. In the present embodiment, since the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is employed, a situation advantageous to the player is likely to occur, and the player is caused by a synergistic effect with the configuration of the second variable winning device 31 described above. It is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation.

  FIG. 8 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower left position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display, for example, a change state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol by 7 segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after being incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that a game ball has entered the middle start winning opening 26 every time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26. It changes to a mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced one by one each time the change of the special symbol is triggered by the entry. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it stores that the game ball has entered the right start winning port 28a. Change to the display mode (up to 4), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  The game state display device 38 includes six LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, probability variation state display lamp 38d, time-short state display lamp 38e, and launch position designation lamp 38f. Yes. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a medium start winning port 26, a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 corresponding to the middle start winning port switch 80 and the right start winning port, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting the entrance of a game ball into the middle start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Furthermore, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning port 31b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the probability variation area switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means). Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a prize opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of game balls into the normal prize openings 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 22 located on the left side of the board, and in the right prize port switch 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board. Also good.

  In any case, winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In the present embodiment, because of the configuration of the game board unit 8, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the probability variation area switch 95 are the panel relay terminal board. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first large winning opening corresponding to the upstream of the probability changing region, respectively. A solenoid 90, a second big prize opening solenoid 97, and a probability changing area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close operations of the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively ( Actuating) or moving the probability variation region slide member 330. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs an operation of continuously (intermittently) launching the game balls one by one toward the game area 8 as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the tray lamp 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output. .

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Further, the cross key button 44 and the effect switching button 45 are connected to the glass frame lighting board 136. When the player pushes the cross key button 44 or the effect switching button 45, the contact signal (press Is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame lighting board 136. Furthermore, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body solenoid 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body solenoid 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The driving signal from the lamp driving circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body solenoid 57 via the panel electric decoration board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  10 and 11 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 11 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power cut-off occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, the probability changing area solenoid 99, etc. The entire contents of the work area excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 13). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. The reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 13). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 13). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 performs the test signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99 as described above. Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the terminal or command control signal.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 10).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and the probability changing area switch 95, a middle start winning port switch 80, a right starting winning port switch 82, a first count switch 84, a second count switch 85, and a winning port switch 86. The input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from is read.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. 2 Controls the display of fluctuation and stop by the special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls. Output the command.
Here, the number of winning balls corresponding to the middle start winning opening switch 80 and the right starting winning opening switch 82 is set in advance to a predetermined number of one or more, and different numbers (for example, three and one), respectively. May be set in advance.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 drives each of the drive signals of the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large prize opening solenoid 90, the second large prize opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer, and the test. Output the port with the signal etc.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) in steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated in the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 13). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning mouth count process. In the first grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning mouth count process. In the second grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

  Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the probability changing area switch 95 corresponding to the probability changing area provided in the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes the process at the time of passing through the probability changing region. As the process at the time of passing through the probability changing area, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag in the flag region of the RAM 76 as a gaming state flag (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means) ). The probability variation function activation flag is reset when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the big hit game (see step S4650 in FIG. 30). Further, as the process at the time of passing through the probability variation area, the main control CPU 72 generates a probability variation area passing command. The probability variation area passing command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13). The main control CPU 72 may execute the process at the time of passing through the probability variation area only within a specific effective time (for example, within the time during which the solenoid 99 for the probability variation area is operated during the big hit game). On the other hand, if no detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 13).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section has a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. Are stored as a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball generated during the big hit.

  Step S37: When the jackpot is not a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 14).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 15), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 15) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 15) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 15) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 15) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the same incoming ball that occurred during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, thereby producing the production contents. It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 14).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 performs this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 15 and step S46 in FIG. 16) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of the small hit, similarly to the process at the time of the above-described loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition effect determination process after executing the determination result management process of step S82, and the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol of the caller. The process returns to the storage update process (FIG. 16). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random number stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number paired with this is “the second big winning opening long open symbol (5 round symbol 2, 10 round symbol) For example, “A0H” is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in the above step S54, and from the result, the “second big winning opening short opening symbol (10 round symbol 1, 5 round symbol 1)” or “second” It is determined whether the winning prize long open symbol (10-round symbol 2, 5-round symbol 2, 16-round symbol) is applicable. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “second big prize opening short opening symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value indicates “second big winning opening long open symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, “01H” is set as the special symbol destination determination value when it corresponds to “second big prize opening short opening design”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “second big winning opening long opening design”. Is done. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a bonus game variable winning device. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of a management process (step S5000) and a small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, if a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win of 5 rounds, a big hit of 10 rounds, or a big hit of 16 rounds, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to a big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. To do. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the big win time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the big win variable winning device management process, the first big winning port solenoid 90 is continuously operated for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds, 0.1 seconds, or until nine game balls are counted). Excitation is performed a number of times (for example, 3, 8, 14 times), whereby the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In addition, after the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30, the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is set for a certain period of time (for example, until 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or five game balls are counted). Excitation is performed for a preset number of times of operation (for example, once or twice), whereby the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are intensively awarded to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 in the case of a big hit is called “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these are called “16 rounds”. Sometimes referred to generically. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in the first to third rounds, the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in the fourth and fifth rounds, and the sixth to sixteenth rounds are operated. Up to this point, the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed. In addition, in this embodiment, not only 16 round big hits but also 10 round big hits and 5 round big hits are provided as types of big hits. A type (winning symbol) may be provided.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big winning variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Alternatively, every time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time shortening state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit prize variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but the first big prize opening is almost generated. do not do.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for example, (1) “16 round jackpot”, (2) “10 round jackpot 1”, (3) “10 round jackpot 2”, (4) “5 round jackpot 1”, (5) “2 round big hit 2” is provided. However, in this embodiment, jackpots other than 16 rounds, 10 rounds, and 5 rounds may be provided.

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “16 round jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round symbol” of the second special symbol, “10 round jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round symbol 1” of the first special symbol, “10 "Round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round symbol 2" of the first special symbol, "5 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "5 round symbol 1" of the second special symbol, "5 round jackpot “2” corresponds to the jackpot of “5 round symbol 2” of the second special symbol. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[Opening of the big prize opening for winning designs]
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special winning opening opening operation relating to a winning symbol. The contents of the opening of the special winning opening corresponding to each winning symbol will be described.

[5 round symbol 1]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “5-round symbol 1”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). . In this case, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened only for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second opening time) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the 1st to 3rd rounds of the big hit game of “5 round symbol 1” are finished without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. In the fourth and fifth rounds, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once in a very short time (for example, 0.1 second). Therefore, the fourth and fifth rounds of the big hit game of “5 round symbol 1” are finished without giving a substantial ball (prize ball) to the player. If it falls under “5-round symbol 1”, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game, A privilege to shift to the “shortened state” is given to the player. However, in the big hit game of “5-round symbol 1”, even if the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated (released for 0.1 second), the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[5 round symbol 2]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “5 round symbol 2”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, which is three rounds. Continue to eyes. Also, in the fourth and fifth rounds of the big hit game of “5-round symbol 2”, the second grand prize of the second variable prize winning device 31 takes a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds). The mouth is opened several times. For this reason, in the “5-round symbol 2” jackpot game, approximately 5 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. However, in the fourth and fifth rounds of the big hit game of “5 round symbol 2”, the probability variation area solenoid 99 operates, so that the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Note that the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is won in one round. The Similarly, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 also does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times = 5 game balls) is won in one round. Closed.

  In the fourth and fifth rounds, the opening of the second grand prize winning opening for 29.0 seconds through the second special electric accessory 31 starts with a short opening of 0.1 seconds, followed by 1.0 seconds. There is a closure, followed by an opening for 29.0 seconds. Thus, when a game ball enters (wins) the second variable prize-winning device 31 in an open state for 29 seconds, the entered game ball passes through the probability variation area (specific area). In addition, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the fourth and fifth rounds in the case of “5-round symbol 2”, after the big hit game is over, The “probability changing function” is activated, and a privilege for shifting to the “high probability state” is given to the player.

  Furthermore, if it falls under “5 round symbol 2”, regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, By operating the “time reduction function”, a privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” is given to the player.

[10 round symbols 1]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round symbols 1”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). . In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, which is three rounds. Continue to eyes. Similarly, for the 6th to 10th rounds, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds). . In the fourth and fifth rounds, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to third rounds. Therefore, the fourth and fifth rounds of the jackpot game of “10 round symbol 1” are finished without giving substantial play (prize balls) to the player. For this reason, the jackpot game of “10 round symbols 1” gives the player approximately 8 rounds of award (prize balls). If it falls under “10 Round Symbol 1”, even if the “Time Reduction Function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “Time Reduction Function” after the big hit game ends, A privilege to shift to the “shortened state” is given to the player. However, in the jackpot game of “10 round symbols 1”, the probability variation area solenoid 99 does not operate, so that the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area. However, in the big hit game of “10 round symbol 1”, even if the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated (released for 0.1 second), the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area. Note that the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is won in one round. The

[10 round symbols 2]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round symbols 2”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). . In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, which is three rounds. Continue to eyes. Similarly, for the sixth to ninth rounds, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest), In the tenth round, the first grand prize opening is opened once in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to ninth rounds. Therefore, the tenth round of the “10 round symbol 2” jackpot game is completed without giving a substantial game ball (prize ball) to the player. Also, in the fourth and fifth rounds of the “10 round symbol 2” jackpot game, the second grand prize of the second variable prize winning device 31 takes a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds). The mouth is opened several times. For this reason, in the “10 round symbol 2” jackpot game, approximately nine rounds of award (prize balls) are given to the player. However, in the fourth and fifth rounds of the big hit game of “10 round symbol 2”, the probability variation area solenoid 99 operates, so that the game ball may pass through the probability variation area.

  In the fourth and fifth rounds, the opening of the second grand prize winning opening for 29.0 seconds through the second special electric accessory 31 starts with a short opening of 0.1 seconds, followed by 1.0 seconds. There is a closure, followed by an opening for 29.0 seconds. Thus, when a game ball enters (wins) the second variable prize-winning device 31 in an open state for 29 seconds, the entered game ball passes through the probability variation area (specific area). In addition, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the fourth and fifth rounds when it corresponds to “10 round symbols 2”, after the big hit game is over The “probability changing function” is activated, and a privilege for shifting to the “high probability state” is given to the player.

  Furthermore, if it falls under “10 round symbol 2”, regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, By operating the “time reduction function”, a privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” is given to the player.

[16 round designs]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “16 round symbol” mode in the special symbol stop display processing described above, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, which is three rounds. Continue to eyes. In the fourth and fifth rounds, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds). Thereafter, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the sixth round, and this is the 16th round. Continue until. For this reason, in the “16 round symbol” jackpot game, approximately 16 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. However, in the fourth and fifth rounds of the “16-round symbol” jackpot game, the probability variation area solenoid 99 operates, so that the game ball may pass through the probability variation area.

  In the fourth and fifth rounds, the opening of the second grand prize winning opening for 29.0 seconds through the second special electric accessory 31 starts with a short opening of 0.1 seconds, followed by 1.0 seconds. There is a closure, followed by an opening for 29.0 seconds. Thus, when a game ball enters (wins) the second variable prize-winning device 31 in an open state for 29 seconds, the entered game ball passes through the probability variation area (specific area). In addition, when the game ball passes through the probability changing area arranged in the second variable winning device 31 in the fourth and fifth rounds when it corresponds to “16 round symbols”, after the big hit game ends, The “probability changing function” is activated, and a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player.

  Furthermore, if the “16 round symbol” is applicable, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, By operating the “time reduction function”, a privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” is given to the player.

  In any case, the winning symbol corresponds to one of the above “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 2”, or “16 round symbol”, and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game is finished, a privilege for shifting the internal state to the “high probability time shortened state” is given to the player. In addition, when an internal lottery is won in the “high probability time reduction state”, the winning symbol at that time corresponds to any of “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 2”, or “16 round symbol”, and When the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the “high probability time shortened state” is continued (restarted) even after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the above “5 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 1”, the game ball will not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, so the internal state will be Transition to the “low probability time reduction state”. Even if the winning symbol falls under any of the above “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 2”, or “16 round symbol”, the game ball must not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game. After the big hit game, the internal state shifts to a “low probability time state”.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small hit, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). (In this embodiment, no small hit is set for the second special symbol). In such a small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), there is hardly any winning in the first big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the “probability state” or “time reduction state” The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the small hit game ends. The “time reduction state” does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this processing, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value from the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and subtracts it. The later value is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 → About 3 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability non-time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach variation pattern” basically corresponds to a short variation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach variation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and variation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, since the variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, the fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are fluctuation times that are extremely shortened as the fluctuation time in the normal state (for example, about 0.5 seconds) in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in the high probability time reduction state. Is set.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 20: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are five types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The five types are “5 round symbol 1”, “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 1”, “10 round symbol 2” and “16 round symbol”. Each of the five types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “10 round symbol 1”, “10 round symbol 1 a”, “10 round symbol 1 b”, “10 round symbol 1 c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) shown in FIG. decide.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “50”, “50” is the ratio when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. In the second column from the left, “10 round symbol 1” and “10 round symbol 2” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting “10 round symbol 1” is 50/100 (= 50%), and the proportion of selecting “10 round symbol 2” is 100 minutes. Of 50 (= 50%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “01H” and “02H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “10 round symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H01H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to either “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times. However, if the game ball corresponds to “10 round symbols 2” and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) shown in FIG. decide.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value “20”, “30”, “50” indicates the denominator as 100. This corresponds to the ratio of Similarly, in the second column from the left, “5 round symbol 1”, “5 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of “5-round symbol 1” being selected is 20/100 (= 20%), and the proportion of “5-round symbol 2” being selected is It is 30/100 (= 30%), and the ratio at which “16 round symbols” is selected is 50/100 (= 50%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described as “B2H03H”.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions is given 100 times when any of “5 round symbol 1”, “5 round symbol 2”, or “16 round symbol” is met. However, if the game ball corresponds to “5 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability time shortening state” or the “low probability time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates at a higher frequency compared to the normal time (when the time shortening function is not activated). The operation memory for the second special symbol is more easily accumulated than the operation memory for the first special symbol. In this case, if the selection ratio of “16 round symbols” is increased for the second special symbol, it will be easier to win the “16 round symbols” than usual, so that it is possible to increase the player's profit accordingly. There is.

[See Fig. 20: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, for example, a “reach production” is generated on the production to perform a big win. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach effects” are defined, and when a big hit is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected. It will be. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduced state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In this embodiment, variation patterns are not distinguished for each type of jackpot (for example, corresponding to five round big hits, 10 round big hits, and 16 round big hits), but a dedicated variation pattern selection table is used for each big hit. May be used (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “61” to “68” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “81” to “88” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Note that when winning in the high probability time shortening state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without a reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 20: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (big hit symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “5 round symbol 1”, “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 1”, “ In the case of either “10 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 as a gaming state flag (time shortening state transition means) , Time shortening function operating means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figure 18: Special symbol changing process, special symbol stop display process]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. Then, while referring to the value of the timer counter, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, and step S2410 in FIG. 20). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than “0” in the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 20), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: It is confirmed whether or not the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is consumed preferentially is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 20).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “big winning variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round symbols”, a value corresponding to “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2”, a value representing “10 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round symbols”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “10 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply shifted (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the address of the variable winning prize management device processing at the small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”.

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the “high probability time shortening state”, the count-off counter regarding the high probability state and the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), These are a probability variation function operation flag and a time reduction function operation flag. In addition, when shifting to the “low probability time shortening state”, the count-down counter relating to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times), so only the time shortening function operation flag is reset. is there. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended through the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated due to the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. . If the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction state display lamp 38e. Output. Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not turned on when the "time reduced state" ends ( OFF).

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any one of the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation count status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 c representing “16 rounds (16R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation number status specifies “10 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “10 rounds (10R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “5 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing “5 rounds (5R)”.

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
Next, details of the big win variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the big win variable winning device management process. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes a jackpot gaming process selection process (step S5100), a jackpot big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a jackpot big winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and a big hit big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the big win variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit special prize opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit special prize opening / closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit special prize opening / closing operation is performed. If the operation process has been completed, the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process and the big hit big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process for big hits]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning prize opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed and the time of each opening at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (the number of times of opening per round, the time of each opening and the interval time during the round), the interval time between rounds, and one round according to the current winning symbol. The count number (maximum number of winnings) and the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for probability variation area are set. In addition, as for the opening pattern for each winning symbol, as described in the item “Multiple winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 18) [Opening operation of the big prize opening regarding the winning symbol] (FIG. 19) It is. For example, 1 second is set as the interval time during rounds in 4 rounds and 5 rounds in which a plurality of releases are set during one round.

  The interval time between rounds is set differently for, for example, “5 round symbol 1”, “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 1”, “10 round symbol 2”, or “16 round symbol”. Yes. For example, for “10 round symbol 1” and “10 round symbol 2” related to the first special symbol, for example, the interval time between the third and fourth rounds is set to about 10 seconds, and between the other rounds Is set to about 1 to 2.5 seconds. On the other hand, “5 round symbol 1”, “5 round symbol 2” and “16 round symbol” relating to the second special symbol are set to about 1 to 2.5 seconds between all rounds (note that For “5-round symbol 1”, it may be set to about 0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds between all rounds). Also, it may be set in common for all winning types, for example, the interval time between the third and fourth rounds is set to about 10 seconds, and between other rounds it is set to 1 second to 2.5 seconds. It may be set to about seconds.

  The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is, for example, nine for winning (winning) in the first special electric accessory 30 (first grand prize opening), and the second special electric accessory 31 For example, there are five balls (winners) in the (second big prize opening). In addition, when a very short time (about 0.1 seconds) is set as the opening time of the big prize opening, the prize winning to the big prize opening rarely occurs (not impossible but extremely difficult). ).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20). Specifically, if the large category “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. If “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to ten. If “5 round symbol 1” or “5 round symbol 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to five. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76 as a corresponding value on the program (“4” for 5 times, “9” for 10 times, “15” for 16 times), for example.

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time is a sufficient time (for example, a launch control board) that the big winning opening is easily generated during one release. The set 174 is a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired, preferably 6 seconds or more. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit release timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the release time is short (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to win a big prize opening during one opening. This is a time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the firing control board set 174).

  Here, in the 4th and 5th rounds corresponding to “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol”, the release timer value is 0.1 times as one release, The 29.0 second release is set once.

  Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The big hit interval timer includes an interval timer during a round and an interval timer between rounds. The timer value set here is a waiting time during a round or between rounds.

  For example, in the fourth and fifth rounds when “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” correspond, 1.0 second is set as the value of the interval timer during the round. .

  As for the value of the interval timer between rounds, the interval time between the third and fourth rounds is about 10 seconds for “10th round symbol 1” and “10th round symbol 2” related to the first special symbol. For other rounds, it is set to about 1 to 2.5 seconds. On the other hand, “5-round symbol 1”, “5-round symbol 2”, and “16-round symbol” related to the second special symbol are set to about 1 to 2.5 seconds between all rounds. (Note that, regardless of the winning symbol type, 10.0 seconds is set as the interval timer value between the third and fourth rounds, and the interval timer value between the other rounds is 1 second to 2.5 seconds. (Seconds may be set.)

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 32).

[Big prize opening and closing operation processing at big hit]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning prize opening / closing operation process at the big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the interval timer (interval timer during round or interval timer between rounds) is counting down. Specifically, whether or not the interval timer is counting down can be confirmed by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S5314 is already in operation.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern shown in FIG. 19, a drive signal to be applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 operates, and it shifts from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S5303: The main control CPU 72 executes probability variation area release processing. Specifically, based on the operation pattern (same as the operation pattern of the second big prize opening solenoid 97), a drive signal to be applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is output. Thereby, the slide member 330 for the probability variation area moves to a position (drive position) that protrudes toward the front side from the board surface, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation area disposed inside the second big prize opening. It becomes.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit big prize opening release pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 33) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning port or the second large winning port being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9 or 5). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round of big hit) as described above. For example, an upper limit (upper limit of the number of winning balls) of nine winning balls is set for the first winning hole and five for the second winning hole. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  Then, when this process (step S5310) is finished and then the big hit variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the big hit special prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 The above steps S5301 to S5310 are repeatedly executed.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 returns from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes a probability variation region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the probability variation area slide member 330 moves to a position retracted from the board surface (retreat position), and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation area disposed inside the second major winning opening. Become.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer (inter-round interval timer or interval timer between rounds) set in the big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 33).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time between rounds has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process (inter-round interval timer or interval timer between rounds) is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less ( No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 32) at the big hit. Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, “the number of times set in the current round” is determined, for example, “the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times within one round of big hit” This is to cope with the open pattern. In the present embodiment, such an opening pattern (2 times opening) is adopted in the 4th and 5th rounds corresponding to “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 2”, or “16 round symbol”. However, in the other rounds, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, in the rounds other than the 4th and 5th rounds in the case of “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 2”, or “16 round symbol”, the counter value reaches the set number of times by one opening / closing operation. Therefore (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

  On the other hand, in the 4th and 5th rounds corresponding to “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 2”, or “16 round symbol”, a pattern that repeats opening and closing operations a plurality of times within one round is adopted. Therefore, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Closing the big prize at the big hit]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning prize opening closing process. This big winning time big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 32), the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process is the next jump destination. Execute. Then, after the execution of the jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit big winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Run repeatedly. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously performed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (5 times, 10 times, or 16 times). Executed.

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at jackpot]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end processing. This big-hit end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 32).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event process (step S28 in FIG. 14).

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 170 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is set for the high probability state, the winning result may not be obtained in the high probability state, and the state may return to the low probability state (so-called frequency cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 20) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time shortening (for example, 100 times or 10,000 times). Here, which number of shortening times is set depends on the value of the probability variation function activation flag. That is, if the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 10,000 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time reduction state transition means), and the value of the probability variation function activation flag must be set. For example, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. In addition, if the probability variation function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “time reduction in progress”. Is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, details of the small winning time variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the small winning hour variable winning device management process. The small winning time prize winning device management process includes a small winning game process selection process (step S6100), a small winning time big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hitting big prize opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). The sub-group includes a subroutine group of a small winning big prize opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hitting big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hitting end process (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening of the big prize opening to, for example, two based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit release timer, and in such an open time, most of the winnings at the big prize opening occur during one open. No (becomes difficult) short time (for example, a time shorter than one second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening big opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 37). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening and closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operate | moves and it transfers to an open state from a closed state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hitting big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 38) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6308. Execute.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 37). Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step opening before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 returns from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the interval timer set in the above-described small hitting big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 38).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 can change the small hit time. Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 37). Then, when the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Closed big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a small winning big prize closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 38). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit prize opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 37).

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs a small winning game big opening / closing operation process as the next jump destination in the small winning game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 37). Execute. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 37). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the small hit end processing. This small hitting end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hitting. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module, and returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 37).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), deletes “meeting small hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. It should be noted that in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 42 to FIG. 44 are diagrams for explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “low probability state”. In this way, since the [F1] normal mode is in the “low probability non-time shortened state”, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is started by entering the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26. Progress.

  [F1] In the normal mode, when [F2] “10 round symbol 1” is won, [F3] 10 rounds jackpot game (challenge bonus) is executed. [F4] The result is a failure, and [F6] shifts to the revenge mode.

  [F6] The revenge mode is a low probability time shortening state. [F6] In the revenge mode, if the winning result is not obtained and [F7] the special symbol changes 100 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  [F1] In the normal mode, when [F8] “10 round symbol 2” big win is won, [F3] 10 round big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, [F4] to the challenge of the big role [F9] success.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the fourth and fifth rounds of the 10 round big hit game (when winning V), [F10] an effect indicating that V winning has occurred is executed, and [F11] battle mode Migrate to [F11] The battle mode is a high probability time shortening state.

  Although not shown in the figure, [F8] corresponds to the 10th round symbol 2, but when the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the fourth and fifth rounds of the big hit game (when V winning is not won), so-called When the probability change is punctured, [F6] shifts to the revenge mode.

  When the game is progressed with the pachinko machine 1 and the game is executed from the [F1] normal mode to the [F11] battle mode, the game progresses with development different from normal. In the “battle mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “high probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “high probability state”. As described above, since the [F11] battle mode is in the “high probability time shortening state”, the second special symbol starts to change and the game progresses when the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. I will do it. In addition, when there is no working memory of the second special symbol, it means that the first special symbol starts to change and the game proceeds.

  [F11] In battle mode, when [F21] “16 round symbol” or “5 round symbol 2” is won, [F22] Battle reach production where the main character and the opponent battle during the special symbol change Then, at the end of the fluctuation, [F23] the main character wins and the victory effect is executed. When the change of the special symbol is finished, [F24] big hit game (16 round big hit or 5 round big hit) is executed.

  In [F24] jackpot game, if [F21] is “16 round symbols”, a 16 round jackpot (BIGBONUS) that can win 16 rounds is performed, and [F21] “5 round symbols 2” In some cases, a 5-round big hit (REGBONUS) is performed to obtain 5 rounds. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the fourth and fifth rounds during the major performance, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred is executed, and after the big hit game ends, [F11] returns to the battle mode; Become. Although not shown, when the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the fourth and fifth rounds (when V winning is not won), when the so-called probability variation is punctured, [F6] shifts to the revenge mode. It will be.

  [F11] In battle mode, when [F21] “16 round symbol” or “5 round symbol 2” is won, [F22] Battle reach production where the main character and the opponent battle during the special symbol change In the final stage of the change, [F25] the main character is defeated and the defeat effect is sometimes executed. [F25] After the defeat effect, [F26] a resurrection effect is performed in which an assistant appears and wins the opponent. Then, when the change of the special symbol is finished, [F24] big hit game (16 round big hit or 5 round big hit) is executed, and after the big win game when the V winning is generated, [F11] returns to the battle mode.

  [F11] In battle mode, if [F27] “5-round symbol 1” is a big win, [F22] A battle reach effect where the main character and the opponent battle is executed during the variation of the special symbol, and at the end of the variation [F25] The main character is defeated and the defeat effect is executed. Then, a battle mode end effect indicating that the battle mode ends [F28] is executed, and when the big hit game without exiting is completed, the mode shifts to [F6] revenge mode.

  [F11] In battle mode, if [F31] “10 round symbol 2” or [F32] “10 round symbol 1” wins, [F22] Battle where the main character and opponent battle during special symbol changes The reach effect is executed, and at the end of the fluctuation, [F25] the main character is defeated and the defeat effect is executed, and then the battle mode end effect indicating that the battle mode ends [F28] is executed.

  [F31] When the “10 round symbol 2” or [F32] “10 round symbol 1” hits a big hit, after the [F28] battle mode end effect, [F33] 10 round hits unique to the battle mode A game (relief bonus) is executed. Also, during [F33] 10 round big hit game, [F34] big role production challenge is performed, [F31] in the case of "10 round symbol 2" [F35] succeeded, [F32] "10 round In the case of symbol 1 [F36] fails.

  When [F35] is successful (in the case of [F31] “10th round symbol 2”), the probability variation area is released in the fourth and fifth rounds of the 10-round big hit game. When the ball passes (when winning V), [F37] an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred is executed, and [F11] returns to the battle mode. If [F36] fails (in the case of [F32] “10 round symbols 1”), the mode shifts to [F6] revenge mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 44, in the battle reach production where the main character and the opponent battle in [F11] battle mode, [F23] the main character wins and the victory production is executed, and [F24] big hit game (16 round big hit game) [F11] Battle mode will be continued as long as the (5 round big hit) continues to be executed. At this time, in battle reach production, the opponent who will face the main character will be changed to a new character. For example, the first game is played against a panda character, the second game is played against a crocodile character, and the third game is played against a snake character. After that, as long as [F24] jackpot game continues to be executed, the opponent will be renewed. When [F28] battle mode ends, [F6] shifts to revenge mode, and [F1] game mode shifts to normal mode, when [F28] battle mode starts again, the first panda Compete against the character.

  In this embodiment, in this battle mode, for example, every time a new opponent and the main character battle each other (every jackpot hits), a type of BGM (background music) is added. It becomes. Here, as described above, since this battle mode has a mode in which the variation time of the special symbol at the time of loss is very short, the effect in one variation is monotonous, and the variation in a plurality of times is long. If it is performed over a long period of time, the player may get bored, and the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, by causing the player to select a BGM from a plurality of types in advance, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the kind of BGM increases whenever it connects consecutively, the fall of the further interest can be suppressed.

  Note that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all of the game flow.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 45 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the change display and stop display of the special symbol. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
45 (A): For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (the state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, on the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference numerals M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. . These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example of (A) in FIG. 45, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (indicated by broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored number display effect execution means).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are added in the diagram) is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “5 round big hit” or “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed. Specifically, the 4th symbol in a manner corresponding to the winning type (“5 round symbol 1”, “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 1”, “10 round symbol 2”, “16 round symbol”). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
45 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect). Execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the time reduction function is inactive and the probability variation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
45 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 45, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, the number of markers M1 displayed is linked accordingly. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 45, since the first working memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 45 (D): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 45: The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 46 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning) when “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2” corresponds to the non-time shortened state (normal mode). . Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  In the following reach production, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is an aspect of “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2” ( For example, it is executed until the 7 segment LED is stopped and displayed at “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc.) (reach) Production execution means). In addition, in FIG. 46, each production | presentation symbol is simplified and shown only as the number. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
46 (A): For example, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
46 (B): Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 46 (C): after the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 46 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 46, (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and then the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 46 (E): Following the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. Furthermore, in this case, if the number “5” is aligned, the expectation level of the big hit with “10 round symbol 2” will be high, so not only whether or not the lottery is a lottery, but also “ Players can have a variety of tensions.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 46, (F): When the reach state occurs, for a while, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group, and an after-reach notice effect (first time) is performed that passes diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 46, (G): Following the announcement effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “5” is left as it is without being erased. If the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “5” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “4” actually being erased on the screen and the number “5” remaining on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 46 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it was split into a large image, and the content that the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be that of smiling). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As another reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased, and if the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end, it is a big hit” ”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “the jackpot may be close soon” can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 46 (I): For example, the last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to either “10-round symbol 1” or “10-round symbol 2”. However, for example, “5” ”Is displayed in the center of the screen, and this time, an effect is instructed to the player that it corresponds to either“ 10 round symbol 1 ”or“ 10 round symbol 2 ”. .

  In FIG. 46 (J): For example, the stop display effect is also displayed for the stop display effect as the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the fixed stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect. In other words, by making an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is not disclosed to the player that “I won with 10 round symbol 1 or 10 round symbol 2”. I can leave.

  In addition, when it corresponds to "10 round symbol 2", the following production techniques can be adopted. In other words, when “10 round symbol 2” corresponds internally, an even number of effect symbols are stopped and displayed for a while, and the effect symbol “7” is stopped and displayed due to re-variation (for example, re-lottery effect). It is possible to execute an effect that clearly teaches that it corresponds to “10 round symbol 2”.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is not won, the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is similarly performed in a manner of deviation. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Example of the production of a big actor performed when winning in the normal mode]
47 to 52 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of the effect of the active role effect executed at the time of winning in the normal mode.

  In the present embodiment, the challenge bonus effect is executed when the “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2” corresponds to the normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state). In the challenge bonus effect, a challenge game (whether or not) is performed such as whether or not the heart-shaped accessory 40f can be dropped. Then, based on whether the winning type is “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2”, the challenge bonus effect including the result of the challenge game is executed with different contents. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

[Challenge bonus production]
[Opening production]
47 (A): When the opening of the big hit game is started, character information such as “challenge bonus” is displayed on the screen, for example. As a result, the player can be instructed of the type of the big role production to be performed.

  In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, “5” effect symbol) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the five effect symbols”.

[Round 1]
In FIG. 47 (B): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, a female character appears and character information such as “If you drop a heart character during the challenge bonus, V Attacker will open!” Is displayed. At the same time, the production of the dialogue is executed, and the explanation in the challenge bonus is started. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the condition that the V-attacker is released during the challenge bonus is related to the fall of the heart character. The V attacker represents the second variable winning device 31 having a probability variation area inside.

[Basic screen]
Further, during the big hit game, the big hit game proceeds while displaying the basic screen unique to the big hit game. For example, the basic screen during a jackpot game is the number of “paid-out balls” acquired during the jackpot game at the upper left corner of the screen, and the number of consecutive chants that represent the number of consecutive hits without returning to the normal mode. ”,“ Right-handed information ”indicating the direction in which the game ball is fired at the upper right corner position of the screen,“ Round number information ”indicating the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game and the remaining number of rounds at the bottom thereof, and In the lower right corner position, it is composed of “remaining eyes” of production symbols corresponding to the winning symbol. In this example, since “0 cars” is displayed as the “number of balls to be paid out”, it means that the winning ball has not been paid out since the big hit game has started, Since “☆ × 1” is displayed, it means that the big hit game is not yet continuous. Further, as the “round number information”, 10 round icons are arranged. Here, the “icon” displayed on the screen indicates how many rounds are played in the current jackpot game with the displayed number. In addition, by changing the display color of the icon (different from other icons), the icon is expressed as if it was consumed, and the number of rounds completed so far and the number of rounds currently in progress are shown to the player. Teaching. In the example shown in the figure, since 10 icons are arranged, it means that this jackpot game is played over 10 rounds, and that one icon is consumed, and the first round is currently being performed. It represents that.

[2nd round]
In FIG. 47 (C): When the second round of the jackpot game is started, the explanation during the challenge bonus is continued. Specifically, text information such as “Enter a battle mode when a ball is inserted into V Attacker!” Is displayed, and an effect of generating a female character dialogue is executed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that when a game ball is inserted into the V-attacker, the mode shifts to the battle mode representing the high probability time shortened state after the big hit game is over.

  Further, in the basic screen, character information such as “150 cars” is shown as the “number of payout balls” by the winning balls acquired in the first round. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that 150 prize balls have been acquired in the first round. Further, in the “round number information”, two icons are consumed. In this way, when the winning balls are played in the form of “100 balls” or “200 cars” due to the winning ball accompanying the winning game at the jackpot game, the number increases and the jackpot Each time the game progresses smoothly and the rounds are switched every round, the color of the “round number information” icon changes one by one and is consumed. Since the same applies to the following rounds, the description is omitted.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 47 (D): When the third round of the jackpot game is started, the explanation during the challenge bonus is continued. Specifically, text information such as “Please hit the button repeatedly to drop the heart character!” Is displayed, and an effect of generating a female character dialogue is executed. As a result, the player can be informed that the fall of the heart-shaped accessory 40f, which is the condition for releasing the V-attacker, requires that the effect switching button 45 be repeatedly hit.

[Interval time between 3rd and 4th round]
In FIG. 48 (E): When the third round of the jackpot game is finished, an interval longer than that between other rounds (for example, about 10 seconds) is started. Using this interval time, a challenge game is performed to determine whether or not the heart-shaped accessory 40f can be dropped. In this example, an effect switching button 45 and a meter divided into 12 pieces extending from the effect switching button 45 to the position of the heart-shaped accessory 40f at the top of the screen are displayed, and an effect requesting the press of the effect switching button 45 is displayed. Is executed. In addition, character information such as WIN is displayed at the top of the meter. Thus, the player can be instructed that the effect switching button 45 is continuously hit and the meters are filled one by one, and the heart-shaped accessory 40f falls when reaching the WIN.

  FIG. 48 (F): It is shown that when the interval progresses smoothly and the player repeatedly hits the effect switching button 45 in the challenge game, up to about eight meters are reached.

[In the case of 10 round symbol 2]
In FIG. 48 (G): And, when the winning type is winning with 10 rounds of symbol 2, the player has hit the effect switching button 45 repeatedly, so that all 12 meters are filled and WIN is reached. ing. An example of winning in 10-round symbol 1 will be described later ((G) to FIG. 51).

  In FIG. 48 (H): An effect is produced in which the heart-shaped accessory 40f falls on the front surface of the display screen. Thereby, it can be taught that the player has successfully dropped the heart-shaped accessory 40f and that the V-attacker will be released.

[Round 4]
In FIG. 49 (I): When the interval time between rounds is over and the fourth round of the jackpot game is started, a female character appears, and a character such as “Great success! Put a ball in V Attacker!” Information is displayed and an effect of producing a dialogue is executed, and an arrow pointing to the second variable winning device 31 is displayed. As a result, it can be taught to the player that the V-attacker is open and that a game ball needs to be entered there.

[4th, 5th round]
In FIG. 49 (J): When the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the V mark is displayed on the screen and a blessing effect is executed. The same blessing effect is continuously executed in the fifth round of the big hit game. Thereby, it will be decided to enter the battle mode. That is, the gaming state after the big hit game is shifted to the high probability time shortening state.

[6th round]
In FIG. 49 (K): When the sixth round of the jackpot game is started, a female character appears, character information such as “Choose the main character in the battle mode!” Is displayed, and the female character is the dialogue. An effect is issued. Further, three main characters (a female character 1, a female character 2, and a female character 3) appear at the bottom of the character information, and an effect that allows the player to select one of the main characters is executed. Thereby, a player can be made to select the hero at the time of fighting in battle mode.

[Round 7]
In FIG. 49 (L): When the seventh round of the jackpot game is started, character information such as “Decide to female character 2!” Is displayed, and an effect that the female character emits speech is executed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the main character in the battle mode is determined.

[Eighth round]
In FIG. 50 (M): When the eighth round of the jackpot game is started, character information such as “Choose an opponent in the battle mode!” Is displayed, and an effect of generating a dialogue is executed. Further, three opponents (a panda character, a black neck character, and a snake character) appear at the bottom of the character information, and an effect that allows the player to select one of the opponents is executed. Thereby, a player can be made to select the opponent at the time of fighting in battle mode.

[9th round]
In FIG. 50, (N): When the ninth round of the jackpot game is started, character information such as “Decide to be a panda character!” Is displayed, and an effect that a female character utters a speech is executed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the opponent at the time of competing in the battle mode has been determined.

[10th round]
In FIG. 50, (O): When the 10th round (final round) of the jackpot game is started, text information such as “If the hero (female character 2) wins, the bonus is confirmed! Do your best!” Is displayed. , The production that the female character speaks is executed. Thereby, it is possible to teach the gameability of the battle mode such that if the hero battles in the battle mode and can win a brilliant victory, it becomes a bonus.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 50 (P): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the text information “Battle mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the battle mode of “high probability time reduction state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  The above corresponds to “10 round symbol 2”, and the chance game of whether or not the heart-shaped accessory 40f falls or not succeeds, and the game ball enters the open V attacker and passes through the probability variation area. By doing so, it is an example of production that enters the battle mode. Next, an example of an effect in the case of “10 round symbols 1” will be described. Specifically, an example of the production from the continuation of the challenge game of (F) in FIG. 48 will be described.

[In the case of 10 round symbols 1]
In FIG. 51 (G): When the winning type is winning with 10 rounds of symbol 1, all 12 meters cannot be filled even though the player repeatedly hits the effect switching button 45, and WIN is reached. It is shown that there was not. In this example, character information such as “LOSE” is displayed on the front surface of the meter. As a result, the player can be informed that the chance game has failed.

[4th, 5th round]
When the interval time between rounds ends, the fourth round of the jackpot game is started. However, since the winning type corresponds to the 10th round symbol 1, the fourth variable and the fifth round of the jackpot game are the second variable winning device 31. Can be opened only for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), so the round ends immediately. The fourth and fifth rounds are also released for a short time (0.1 second) at the same time, but the game ball passes through the probability variation area because the distance from the entrance of the second variable winning device 31 is far away. There is no.

[6th round]
In FIG. 51 (H): When the sixth round of the jackpot game starts, a female character appears, and text information such as “Enter the revenge mode after the bonus!” Is done. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game state after the big hit game is shifted to the revenge mode in the low probability time shortened state.

[Round 7]
In FIG. 51 (I): When the seventh round of the jackpot game is started, character information such as “If the battle starts during the revenge mode, the jackpot!” Is displayed, and the female character produces a dialogue Is executed. Thereby, the gameability in the revenge mode can be explained to the player.

[Eighth round]
In FIG. 51 (J): When the eighth round of the jackpot game is started, character information such as “Choose a hero in the revenge mode!” Is displayed, and an effect that a female character utters a speech is executed. The Further, three main characters (a female character 1, a female character 2, and a female character 3) appear at the bottom of the character information, and an effect that allows the player to select one of the main characters is executed. This allows the player to select the main character in the revenge mode.

[9th round]
In FIG. 52 (K): When the ninth round of the jackpot game is started, character information such as “Decide to female character 2!” Is displayed, and an effect that the female character emits speech is executed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the main character in the revenge mode has been determined.

[10th round]
In FIG. 52 (L): When the 10th round (final round) of the jackpot game is started, character information such as “Enter the battle mode if the hero (female character 2) wins!” Is displayed, and the woman An effect in which the character utters a line is executed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that if the main character wins the battle in the revenge mode, it is possible to enter the battle mode again in a state with a high probability time reduction state.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 52 (M): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during end processing), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, character information “revenge mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, it is possible to instruct the player to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” revenge mode as a bonus after the big hit game ends.

  The above is an example of an effect during a big hit game when the game corresponds to “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2” in the normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state). Next, an example of an effect in the battle mode (high probability time reduction state) will be described.

[Battle mode entry production]
In FIG. 53 (A): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during end processing), a battle mode entry effect is executed, in which the internal state to be transferred thereafter teaches the high probability time shortening state.

[First special symbol variation display]
In FIG. 53 (B): For example, the first variation display is performed after the end of the big hit game, so that the variation display of the effect symbols is performed in the “battle mode” state. The background image of the battle mode is a background image in which the female character 2 as the main character and the panda character as the opponent are opposed to deeply impress the player with the battle performance. Yes. In addition, three effect symbols are variably displayed at the upper left portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower portion of the screen.

[First special symbol stop display]
In FIG. 53 (C): Since the first change (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("5"-"2"-"6 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

[Second special symbol variation display]
In FIG. 53 (D): the game in the battle mode proceeds smoothly, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. In this example, a state in which the panda character pushes out the female character 2 is shown. When the female character 2 is pushed out as it is, a battle is started in a state where the panda character is advantageous.

[Second special symbol stop display]
In FIG. 54, (E): Since the second special symbol change (during non-winning) has ended, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("4"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

[Second special symbol variation display]
In FIG. 54 (F): The game in the battle mode proceeds smoothly, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In this example, a state in which the female character 2 pushes out the panda character is shown, and when the panda character is pushed out as it is, the female character 2 starts a battle in an advantageous state.

  In FIG. 54, (G): The variation display of the second special symbol proceeds, the female character 2 pushes out the panda character, and the battle starts in a state where the female character 2 is advantageous. That is, it represents that a battle reach effect is executed.

  In FIG. 54 (H): An effect is performed in which the female character turns the drum toward the panda character.

  (I) in FIG. 55: Subsequently, an effect in which a wave is emitted from the drum is executed. If you can defeat the panda character in this state, it will be a big hit.

  (J) in FIG. 55: When the variation of the second special symbol corresponds to the winning and the defeat effect is selected, an effect is performed in which the panda character rebounds the wave fired from the drum.

  In FIG. 55, (K): When the state of the female character 2 being collapsed is displayed together with the characters “defeated,...”, It is transmitted to the player that the player has lost the battle. Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is stopped in a state where the effect symbol is reduced ("2"-"3"-"2"). In addition, it is assumed that the variation of the second special symbol is in the final stage, and after this, the production will change depending on the winning type (5 round symbol 1, 5 round symbol 2, 16 round symbol) A typical production example will be described later.

  In FIG. 55 (L): On the other hand, if the change of the second special symbol corresponds to the win and the victory effect is selected, the panda character will be swayed, causing an explosion and causing the panda character to be far away. The production that is skipped to is executed.

  In FIG. 55, (M): When the female character is displayed large together with the characters “Victory!” And the panda character is displayed small, it is transmitted to the player that it is a big hit (winning). Further, in the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is finely moved (“2”-“2”-“2”).

  In FIG. 55 (N): The effect symbols are returned to the state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also in a changing state.

[For 16 rounds]
[Promotion promotion]
In FIG. 56 (O): The promotion effect is started from here. Specifically, the effect symbols that are arranged in three are displayed gradually smaller, and the effect that the effect symbols that are arranged in three are sucked into the back side of the screen while rotating.

  56 (P): The three effect symbols are so small that they cannot be visually recognized. At that time, the image of the effect switching button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the effect switching button 45 is pressed. An effect is urged for the player.

[Promotion of successful promotion]
In FIG. 56 (Q): When the promotion effect is successful, that is, when it corresponds to 16 round big hit ("16 round symbol"), the promotion success effect is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. The number of the production symbol is changed from “2” to “7”.

  In FIG. 56, (R): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, orange display color) corresponding to the 16 round big hit (“16 round symbol”). After that, a big bonus that will be a big hit of 16 rounds is entered, and a big-game effect is performed on the screen.

[In case of 5 round symbol 2]
[Promotion promotion]
In FIG. 57 (O): When the promotion effect is started, the three effect symbols are displayed gradually smaller, and the three effect symbols are sucked into the back side of the screen while rotating. Is executed.

  In FIG. 57 (P): The three effect symbols become so small that they cannot be visually recognized. At that time, the image of the effect switch button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the effect switch button 45 is pressed. An effect is urged for the player.

[Promotion failure promotion]
In FIG. 57, (Q): When the promotion effect fails, that is, when the big round hits 2 ("5 round symbol 2"), the promotion failure effect is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. The In the case of a failure effect, the number of the effect symbol is maintained as “2”.

  In FIG. 57, (R): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. After this, a regular bonus effect corresponding to 2 in 5 rounds is performed.

  Next, the case where the hero loses to the opponent in a battle will be described. Here, the effects after defeat are different depending on the type of winning, and when winning with "5 Round Symbol 2" or "16 Round Symbol", when winning with "5 Round Symbol 1" An explanation will be given of a case where winning is made with “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2”. In addition, since “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2” is the winning type corresponding to the first special symbol, it was won in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol in the battle mode (high probability time shortening state). Assume the case. In addition, when “10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2” is won, it is assumed that a defeat effect ((K) in FIG. 55) is executed without fail in the battle.

[For 5 round symbols 2 or 16 round symbols]
[Restoration production]
58 (B): When the defeat effect ((A) in FIG. 58) proceeds, a resurrection effect in which a helper character appears in the central portion of the liquid crystal screen is executed. In the example shown in the figure, a hermit character is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether something else has happened even though the defeat effect has been executed.

  In FIG. 58 (C): When the rebirth effect is continuously executed, the effect of swinging the staff held by the hermit character and flipping the panda character is executed.

(D) in FIG. 58: In the final stage of the revival effect, the victory effect is executed. Specifically, along with the characters “Victory”, the hermit character is displayed large, and the female character 2 is displayed small next to it. This tells the player that he has won the battle after defeat.
Thereafter, the promotion effect shown in (N) of FIG. 55 is executed, and a bonus with a big bonus or a regular bonus is issued according to the winning type.

[In the case of 5 round symbols 1]
[Battle mode end effect (end effect)]
59 (B): When the defeat effect ((A) in FIG. 59) progresses, the resurrection effect is not executed, and the variation of the second special symbol ends. Then, the big hit game is started, and the battle mode end effect indicating that the battle mode (high probability time shortened state) is ended is executed as the effect during the big game. In this example, character information such as “battle mode end” is displayed on the screen. Thereby, the player can be informed that the “high probability time shortening state”, which is a privilege after the end of the big hit game, has ended. The battle mode end effect is executed from the final stage of the variable display of the second special symbol (after the defeat effect is executed to some extent).

[Bonus production without ball]
In the big hit game for the 5-round symbol 1, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are each opened for a short time (about 0.1 second). However, since it is difficult to enter the big winning opening when it is opened for a short time, a battle mode end effect (a bonus effect without a ball appearance) is executed as an effect during the performance.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 59 (C): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, character information “revenge mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, it is possible to instruct the player to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” revenge mode as a bonus after the big hit game ends.

(Revenge mode)
[Second special symbol variation display]
In FIG. 59 (D): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “revenge mode” state. The background image of the revenge mode is a background image in which a female character 2 as a main character searches for an opponent and walks along the coast.

[In case of 10 round symbol 1 or 10 round symbol 2]
[Battle mode end effect]
60 (B): When the defeat effect ((A) in FIG. 60) progresses, a battle mode end effect indicating that the battle mode (high probability time reduction state) has ended is executed. In this example, character information such as “battle mode end” is displayed on the screen. Thereby, the player can be informed that the “high probability time shortening state”, which is a privilege after the end of the big hit game, has ended. In addition, the change display of the first special symbol is continued, and the fourth symbol Z1 is also changed.

[Relief]
In FIG. 60, (C): When a battle mode end effect is executed and a certain amount of time has passed (for example, about 2.0 seconds), a relief effect suggesting that there is a possibility of entering the battle mode. Executed. In the example shown in the figure, an angel character appears, character information such as “Don't give up yet!” Is displayed, and an effect of producing a dialogue is executed. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether something else has happened even though the battle mode end effect has been executed.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 60 (D): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is returned to the state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. In this example, the stop display effect is performed in a state where the character information such as “relief bonus” is written as the effect symbol in the middle. In addition, the fourth symbol Z1 is actually stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the 10 round big hit (“10 round symbol 1” or “10 round symbol 2”). After that, the player enters a relief bonus that is a big hit of 10 rounds, and a big-game effect is executed on the screen.

[Relief Bonus]
[Opening production]
In FIG. 61 (E): When the opening of the big hit game is started, for example, character information such as “relief bonus” is displayed on the screen. As a result, the player can be instructed of the type of the big role production to be performed.

  In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, an effect symbol of “Relief Bonus”) is displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player that “the winning symbol is the winning bonus” symbol. .

[Round 1]
In FIG. 61 (F): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, a female character appears and character information such as “If a heart character is dropped during the relief bonus, V Attacker will open!” Is displayed. At the same time, an effect of producing a dialogue is executed, and explanation in the relief bonus is started. Thereby, it can be instructed to the player that the condition that the V-attacker is released during the relief bonus is related to the fall of the heart character. Therefore, it represents that almost the same contents of the effect are executed with only a part different from the challenge bonus effect ((B) in FIG. 47).

[2nd round]
In FIG. 61 (G): When the second round of the jackpot game is started, the explanation in the relief bonus is continued. Specifically, text information such as “Enter a battle mode when a ball is inserted into V Attacker!” Is displayed, and an effect of generating a female character dialogue is executed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that when a game ball is inserted into the V-attacker, the mode shifts to the battle mode representing the high probability time shortened state after the big hit game is over. Therefore, it represents that the same effect content as the challenge bonus effect is executed ((C) in FIG. 47).

[3rd round]
In FIG. 61 (H): When the third round of the jackpot game is started, the explanation in the relief bonus is continued. Specifically, text information such as “Please hit the button repeatedly to drop the heart character!” Is displayed, and an effect of generating a female character dialogue is executed. As a result, the player can be informed that the fall of the heart-shaped accessory 40f, which is the condition for releasing the V-attacker, requires that the effect switching button 45 be repeatedly hit. Therefore, it represents that the same effect content as the challenge bonus effect is executed ((D) in FIG. 47).

[After the 4th round]
Similar to the first to third rounds, the same content as the challenge bonus is executed for the fourth round. Therefore, when the winning type in the challenge bonus is “10 round symbol 1”, the challenge game fails, and after the big hit game, the revenge mode (low probability time shortened state) is entered, and “10 round symbol 2”. If the game is successful, the challenge game is successful, and when the probability variation area is passed, an effect of entering the battle mode again after the big hit game is completed is executed. It should be noted that after the challenge game, the effect of selecting the main character or the effect of selecting the opponent may or may not be executed. When the effect to be selected is not executed, the setting in the battle mode (the setting of the main character and the opponent) performed before the big hit game is used as it is.

  In this way, in the battle mode (high probability time shortening state), when the result of the internal lottery of the second special symbol corresponds to the win, a battle effect in which the main character and the opponent perform a battle is executed, and the battle effect is won. If applicable, it becomes a bonus with a pitch (big bonus or regular bonus), and if it is defeated by a battle effect, it becomes a bonus without a ball (a battle mode end effect is executed). Here, since it is right-handed during the battle mode, basically only the internal lottery relating to the second special symbol is executed, but when the first battle mode is entered, the working memory of the first special symbol exists. In a situation where the working memory of the second special symbol is lost during the battle mode, the first special symbol may fluctuate. And if the internal lottery of the 1st special symbol corresponds to the win during the battle mode, 10 rounds of big win will be started, but the number of rounds of big hit games (5 rounds or 16 rounds) related to the 2nd special symbol, the interval between rounds Since the time and probability variation entry rate (selection ratio of the winning type in which the probability variation region is opened for a long time) is different from that related to the first special symbol, it is not possible to use a bonus effect with or without a ball. Therefore, if the first special symbol is won, the player loses the battle, executes the battle mode end effect, and makes the player recognize that there will be no bonus, and then executes the relief effect, The big hit game will be executed with the way of showing the last chance to enter the mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of discomfort with respect to being able to obtain a large number of balls even though the battle is defeated. Further, the relief bonus effect during the big hit game can change a part of the challenge bonus effect at the time of the first hit, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the effect, the production man-hours, and the like.

  Next, an effect when the player changes BGM (background music) that excites the effect in a gaming state in which the variation of the special symbol such as the battle mode ends in a short time will be described. FIG.62 and FIG.63 is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the effect at the time of BGM change operation in battle mode. In this production example, it is assumed that the second battle mode is progressing through the jackpot game, and three of the eight types of BGM in the battle mode stored in advance in the pachinko machine 1 are stored. A case where can be selected will be described.

  In FIG. 62 (A): For example, in the second battle mode, a character image such as “second game” is displayed at the top of the screen, and the opponent who battles the main character from “Panda character” of the first game to “rokuro neck” It has changed to “Character”. At this time, it is assumed that BGM title 1 is output from pachinko machine 1 as the type of BGM.

  62 (B): The battle mode of the second game is proceeding smoothly, and the player can change the type of BGM while the second special symbol is being displayed. Assume that is pressed. In response to pressing of the upper button 44a, the BGM selection interface image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Here, the BGM selection interface image is displayed in a form to be covered by the opponent, but is not limited to this, and is displayed in another place (for example, the lower position of the main character) or the size of the image is also appropriate. It may be changed or may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner. At this time, the type of BGM is not changed, and the BGM title 1 is continuously output from the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, in the BGM selection interface image, different BGM types are described in the upper, middle, and lower stages, respectively, and the description of the BGM type in the intermediate stage is displayed larger than other types. For example, BGM type (BGM title) such as “???” is displayed in the upper row, “BGM title 1” is displayed in the middle row, and “BGM title 2” is displayed in the lower row. Here, the BGM in the middle stage represents the type of BGM that is currently output. By displaying the BGM large, it is possible to teach the player the type of the current BGM in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, “????” is written as the type of BGM in the upper stage, so that it is possible to teach the player that the current selection is not possible.

  In addition, an arrow indicating an upward direction and an arrow indicating a downward direction are displayed between the types of BGM. For example, an arrow indicating an upward direction (for example, an image simulating the upper button 44a of the cross key button 44) is displayed between the upper and middle BGM types, and the middle and lower BGM types are displayed. In between, an arrow indicating a downward direction (for example, an image imitating the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44) is displayed. Thus, by displaying the arrow, it can be taught that the player can easily change to the type of BGM indicated in the upper or lower level by operating the button.

  In FIG. 62 (C): the cross key button for the player to change the type of BGM while the BGM selection interface image is displayed during the stop display after the second special symbol change display is finished. It is assumed that the lower button 44c 44 is pressed. That is, this indicates that the player has pressed the lower button 44 c of the cross key button 44 for the purpose of changing to the BGM title 2. At the time of pressing, the BGM title 1 is continuously output from the pachinko machine 1.

  Based on the depression of the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44, a selection effect (scroll effect) is performed in the BGM selection interface image. Specifically, the types of BGM described in the upper, middle, and lower stages are scrolled upward, and as a result of the scrolling, a decision effect is executed. In the upper part, “BGM title 1” is displayed. The BGM type (BGM title) such as “BGM title 2” and “???” is displayed in the lower row. When the scrolling is completed, the type of BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is changed from the BGM title 1 to the BGM title 2.

  In FIG. 62 (D): After that, the stop display of the second special symbol is finished and the display is changed. While the BGM selection interface image is displayed, the player again changes the BGM type. Assume that the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 is pressed. In other words, this indicates that the player has pressed the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 for the purpose of changing from the BGM title 2 to another type of BGM.

  Based on the depression of the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44, a selection effect (scroll effect) is performed in the BGM selection interface image. Specifically, the BGM types described in the upper, middle, and lower stages are scrolled upward, and as a result of the scrolling, “BGM title 2” is displayed in the upper stage, “???” The BGM type (BGM title) such as “???” is displayed in the lower row. However, this scrolling does not end, that is, the BGM type notation is not stopped at the upper, middle, and lower positions, and the scrolling is continued. Therefore, the BGM title 2 is continuously output from the pachinko machine 1.

  In FIG. 63 (E): Furthermore, the selection effect (scroll effect) is continuously performed in the BGM selection interface image. For example, “????” is displayed in the upper row, “???” is displayed in the middle row, and “???” is displayed in the lower row. Is continuously scrolled in a state where a BGM type (BGM title) such as “BGM title 5” is displayed. At this time, the cross key button 44 from the player is not performed. Further, the BGM title 2 is continuously output from the pachinko machine 1. Here, the variable display of the second special symbol is finished and the stop display is performed.

  63 (F): After that, when the selection effect (scroll effect) in the BGM selection interface image ends, the determination effect is executed, and the type of BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is changed from BGM title 2 to BGM title 5. Be changed. In the BGM selection interface image, as a result of scrolling, the BGM type (BGM title) such as “???” is displayed at the top, “BGM title 5” is displayed at the middle, and “???” is displayed at the bottom. Will be. Here, the stop display of the second special symbol is finished, and the variable display is performed.

  63 (G), (H): When the type of BGM is changed to BGM title 5 and the cross key button 44 is not pressed for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). The BGM selection interface image is erased from the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. In addition, without deleting the BGM selection interface image, the main character and the battle character may move to the back of the image facing each other, and may be hidden in a form invisible to the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the BGM is changed without depending on the time point when the special symbol variation display or stop display is started. In addition, the selection of BGM can be performed over a plurality of special symbol fluctuation displays and stop displays. Specifically, the BGM selection interface image can be displayed over a plurality of fluctuation displays and stop displays. Similarly, the selection effect (scroll effect) performed in the image can be executed over a plurality of variable displays and stop displays. Therefore, even if the variation time is short and the BGM selection effect (scroll effect) and the decision effect straddle a plurality of special symbol variations, the BGM change effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  FIG.64 and FIG.65 is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the effect at the time of BGM change operation in battle mode. In this example, it is assumed that the special symbol is displayed for a longer time (eg, about 9 seconds) than usual (about 0.3 seconds).

  In FIG. 64 (A): The battle mode of the second battle is proceeding smoothly, and the player presses the upper button 44a of the cross key button 44 in order to change the BGM type while the second special symbol is being displayed. Assume that the button is pressed. In response to pressing of the upper button 44a, the BGM selection interface image is displayed on the left side of the screen.

  Further, in the BGM selection interface image, different BGM types are described in the upper, middle, and lower stages, respectively, and the description of the BGM type in the intermediate stage is displayed larger than other types. For example, BGM type (BGM title) such as “???” is displayed in the upper row, “BGM title 1” is displayed in the middle row, and “BGM title 2” is displayed in the lower row.

  FIG. 64 (B): It is assumed that the player presses the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 in order to change the BGM type in a state where the BGM selection interface image is displayed. That is, this indicates that the player has pressed the lower button 44 c of the cross key button 44 for the purpose of changing to the BGM title 2. At the time of pressing, the BGM title 1 is continuously output from the pachinko machine 1. Based on the depression of the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44, a selection effect (scroll effect) is performed in the BGM selection interface image. Specifically, the types of BGM described in the upper, middle, and lower stages are scrolled upward, and as a result of the scrolling, a decision effect is executed. In the upper part, “BGM title 1” is displayed. The BGM type (BGM title) such as “BGM title 2” and “???” is displayed in the lower row. When the scrolling is completed, the type of BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is changed from the BGM title 1 to the BGM title 2.

  (C) in FIG. 64: It is assumed that the player then presses down the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 again in order to change the type of BGM while the BGM selection interface image is displayed. In other words, this indicates that the player has pressed the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 for the purpose of changing from the BGM title 2 to another type of BGM. Here, it is further assumed that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed over a long time (for example, about 9 seconds) instead of the normal time (about 0.3 seconds).

  Based on the depression of the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44, a selection effect (scroll effect) is performed in the BGM selection interface image. Specifically, the BGM types described in the upper, middle, and lower stages are scrolled upward, and as a result of the scrolling, “BGM title 2” is displayed in the upper stage, “???” The BGM type (BGM title) such as “???” is displayed in the lower row. However, this scrolling does not end, that is, the BGM type notation is not stopped at the upper, middle, and lower positions, and the scrolling is continued. Therefore, the BGM title 2 is continuously output from the pachinko machine 1.

  In FIG. 64 (D): Selection effects are continuously performed in the BGM selection interface. In addition, the display of the variation of the second special symbol has progressed for about one second from the start, so that the opponent is pushing the hero on the screen, and the opponent is in an advantageous state when the hero is pushed out as it is. When the battle with the opponent starts, the battle reach effect is executed. It is assumed that the battle reach effect is not executed in the fluctuation over 9 seconds.

  In FIG. 65 (E): When about 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, an effect in the screen is advanced, and an effect is performed in which the opponent chases the hero who escapes. At this time, the BGM selection interface is not displayed without waiting for the end of the selection effect. Thereby, the effect of the area where the BGM selection interface is displayed is displayed without being hidden, and the player can show all the effects of the main character and the opponent. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the result of whether or not the battle reach effect is executed.

  In addition, since the BGM selection interface is hidden and the selection of the BGM is interrupted, the operation (button press) for selecting the BGM is invalid. This invalid period will continue until this change ends and the stop display ends. When the next special symbol change starts, the operation for selecting BGM (button press) becomes valid.

  In FIG. 65, (F): In this example, the production in the screen proceeds, and the production in which the main character finds the lion is executed.

  In FIG. 65 (G): The opponent who has chased the hero is performing an effect that passes without discovering the hero hidden in the lion. Therefore, the hero and the opponent do not face each other, and the battle reach effect is not executed. In other words, the current fluctuation represents not a big hit but an outlier.

  In FIG. 65 (H): Thereafter, the variation of the special symbol over a long time (about 9 seconds) is finished, and the stop display is performed. At this time, the first performance in which the main character and the opponent confront each other is performed on the screen. When the special symbol stop display is finished and a new special symbol variable display is started, the BGM can be selected, and the operation (button pressing) is also effective.

  Since the player's operation is invalidated before the BGM selection interface is hidden, when the player next performs an operation (button press) for selecting the BGM, the BGM selection interface before the operation is performed. An image will be displayed. Specifically, BGM types (BGM title) such as “BGM title 1” in the upper row, “BGM title 2” in the middle row, and “???” in the lower row are displayed as shown in FIG. The Rukoto.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach notice effect, memory number display effect, big-time effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a change pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a probability change area passing command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, or at the time of the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the contents of the production. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body solenoid 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently. In addition, an effect buffer clear process, a BGM selection process, and the like are performed. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol and an effect of erasing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 66).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is performed when the big hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 18) is selected in the main control CPU 72, or the small winning variable variable winning device management process (FIG. 18). When the middle step S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to a loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 10 rounds of big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 10-round big role effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). . As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 66) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 66). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), changes the effect schedule (change time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is “normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)”, the production control CPU 126 selects a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 45B) where the female character is sitting on the chaise longue. Execute the process. When the stay mode is “battle mode (high probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 53) in which the main character and the opponent are opposed to each other. To do. Furthermore, when the stay mode is “revenge mode (low probability time reduction state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 59D) in which the main character runs on the coast. Run.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 68), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804. If the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S802. Run.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S808. Run.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a battle mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes revenge mode big hit effect pattern selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, in the revenge mode, a battle reach effect is performed in which the main character and the opponent battle, and a process of selecting an effect that is a big hit is executed.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIG. 46 or the like is executed.

  Then, when the process of step S804, step S806, or step S808 ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 69).

[Battle mode big hit effect pattern selection processing]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of battle mode big hit effect pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 loads a stop symbol command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the RAM 130, loads the stop symbol command stored in the command buffer area in the previous process (step S400), and confirms the type of the stop symbol. Here, in this embodiment, five types of “5 round symbol 1”, “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 1”, “10 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” are defined as the types of stop symbols. One of these will be confirmed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S822.

  Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the stop symbol type is a 16-round symbol or a 5-round symbol 2. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the type of stop symbol confirmed in the previous process (step S820) is a 16-round symbol or a 5-round symbol 2. If the result of this confirmation is that the type of stop symbol is 16 round symbols or 5 round symbols 2 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S824. On the other hand, if the stop symbol type is neither 16-round symbol nor 5-round symbol 2 (No), that is, if the stop symbol type is 5-round symbol 1, 10-round symbol 1 or 10-round symbol 2, Next, the control CPU 126 executes step S832.

  Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 executes a resurrection effect lottery. Specifically, using a random number for production, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the restoration production. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S826.

  Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not to execute the revival effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms the lottery result of the previous process (step S824). As a result of this confirmation, when executing the revival effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S830. On the other hand, when the revival effect is not executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S828.

  Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 sets a victory effect pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets to execute a victory effect pattern (for example, FIGS. 53 to 57) as a battle reach effect executed during the special symbol variation display. That is, it represents that the victory effect that the hero wins the opponent is selected as the battle reach effect. As a result, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the effect control CPU 126 relates to the victory effect pattern stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Various image data are read out. The effect control CPU 126 returns to the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 70).

  Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 sets a revival effect pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the execution of the revival effect pattern (for example, FIG. 58) as the battle reach effect executed during the special symbol variation display. That is, the hero defeats the opponent as a battle reach effect, but the resurrection effect that the assistant appears and wins the opponent is selected. As a result, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the effect control CPU 126 relates to the revival effect pattern stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Various image data are read out. The effect control CPU 126 returns to the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 70).

  Step S832: The effect control CPU 126 sets a defeat effect pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets to execute a defeat effect pattern (for example, FIG. 53 to FIG. 55) as a battle reach effect executed during the special symbol fluctuation display. That is, it represents that a defeat production in which the main character is defeated by an opponent is selected as a battle reach production. As a result, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the effect control CPU 126 relates to the defeat effect pattern stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Various image data are read out. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S834.

  Step S834: The effect control CPU 126 sets a battle mode end effect pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of a battle mode end effect pattern (for example, FIG. 59) as an effect to be performed after the defeat effect. That is, it represents that the battle mode end effect is selected, which tells the player that the battle mode has ended due to the defeat of the battle. Thereby, the effect control CPU 126 reads various image data related to the battle mode end effect pattern stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 after the defeat effect. It will be. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S836.

  Step S836: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the stop symbol type is the 5-round symbol 1. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the type of the stop symbol confirmed in the previous process (step S820) is the 5-round symbol 1. As a result of the confirmation, if the type of the stop symbol is 5 round symbol 1 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the big hit time variable effect pattern selection process (FIG. 70). On the other hand, when the stop symbol type is not the 5-round symbol 1 (No), that is, when the stop symbol type is the 10-round symbol 1 or the 10-round symbol 2, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S838.

  Step S838: The effect control CPU 126 sets a relief effect pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of a relief effect pattern (for example, FIG. 60) as an effect to be performed after the battle mode end effect. In other words, after the battle mode is ended, a relief effect is selected that teaches the player that there is a possibility of entering the battle mode again. As a result, the effect control CPU 126 reads various image data related to the relief effect pattern stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 after the battle mode end effect. It will be.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 70).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described variation effect pattern selection processing at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S852. Run.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S858. Run.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing when the battle mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG. 53, FIG. 54, and the like is executed.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process at the time of revenge mode deviation. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing when the normal mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG. 45 or the like is executed.

  And after finishing the process of step S854, step S856, or step S858, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 69).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device operation process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operation in-process (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S904 to S908) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device activation pre-processing has not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device activation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. Further, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908) as the next jump destination.

  Step S904: In the variable winning device pre-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. Details of specific processing during the big hit game will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S906: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switch button 45 during execution of the big hit effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and the content of the effect (button effect) according to the result is monitored. The control information is instructed to the display control CPU 146. Further, in this variable winning device operating process, when a probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred (an effect shown in (J) in FIG. 49) is selected. While executing the process, if the probability variation area passing command is not received during the big hit game, a process of selecting an effect (effect shown in (G) in FIG. 51) indicating that no V winning has occurred. Execute.

  Step S908: In the variable winning device post-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the transfer destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes the revenge mode rush effect or executes the battle mode rush effect depending on whether or not the winning symbol or the probability variation area has passed. Specifically, when a probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, a process for selecting an effect (effect shown in (P) in FIG. 50) indicating that the player has entered the battle mode is executed, When the probability variation area passing command is not received during the game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the revenge mode is entered (the effect indicated by (M) in FIG. 52) is executed.

[Pre-processing of variable winning device operation]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of variable winning device operation pre-processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the time reduction state has occurred. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. Since the current state represents a big hit game, the state designation command is stored in advance before the big hit game is started, and the game state before the big hit game is confirmed by checking the stored state designation command. Check if the time has been reduced. As a result of the confirmation, if it is in the time shortening state (Yes), that is, if the mode type is the battle mode or the revenge mode, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S922. On the other hand, when it is not the time reduction state (No), that is, when the mode type is the normal mode, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S936.

  Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 loads a stop symbol command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the RAM 130, loads the stop symbol command stored in the command buffer area in the previous process (step S400), and confirms the type of the stop symbol. Here, in this embodiment, five types of “5 round symbol 1”, “5 round symbol 2”, “10 round symbol 1”, “10 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” are defined as the types of stop symbols. One of these will be confirmed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S924.

  Step S924: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the stop symbol type is a 16-round symbol or a 5-round symbol 2. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the type of stop symbol confirmed in the previous process (step S922) is a 16-round symbol or a 5-round symbol 2. As a result of the confirmation, if the type of the stop symbol is 16 round symbol or 5 round symbol 2 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S930. On the other hand, if the stop symbol type is neither 16-round symbol nor 5-round symbol 2 (No), that is, if the stop symbol type is 5-round symbol 1, 10-round symbol 1 or 10-round symbol 2, Next, the control CPU 126 executes step S928.

  Step S928: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the stop symbol type is the 5-round symbol 1. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the type of the stop symbol confirmed in the previous process (step S922) is the 5-round symbol 1. As a result of this confirmation, when the type of the stop symbol is the 5-round symbol 1 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S932. On the other hand, when the stop symbol type is not the 5-round symbol 1 (No), that is, when the stop symbol type is the 10-round symbol 1 or the 10-round symbol 2, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S934.

  Step S930: The effect control CPU 126 sets a bonus effect pattern with a ball. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 sets a bonus production pattern with a ball as a big game production executed during the big hit game. In addition, the bonus effect with a ball is prepared with a big bonus effect corresponding to 16 rounds of big hit and a regular bonus effect corresponding to 5 rounds of big hit (5 round symbols 2). Bonus production with a ball is changed. For example, it represents that a big bonus effect is selected as a big-game effect that is executed from the first round of a 16-round big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the effect control CPU 126 relates to the bonus effect pattern with a ball that is stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Various image data are read out.

Step S932: The production control CPU 126 sets a bonus production pattern without a ball. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets to execute a bonus effect pattern without a ball (for example, (B) in FIG. 59) as a big-game effect to be executed during the big hit game.
Here, the no-ball-throwing bonus production pattern corresponds to the big-game production executed when the winning type corresponds to the 5-round symbol 1, and the big hit game is completed in a short time (the first big prize opening is No special effects are prepared, with 0.1 second opening 3 times and 2nd big prize opening 2 times 0.1 second opening). Accordingly, the no-bounce bonus effect represents the battle mode end effect and is executed in a form in which the battle mode end effect is continued.

  Step S934: The effect control CPU 126 sets a relief bonus effect pattern. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 sets a relief bonus production pattern (for example, FIG. 61) as a big game production executed during the big hit game. That is, it represents that the relief bonus effect is selected as the big-game effect that is executed from the first round of the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the effect control CPU 126 displays various images related to the relief bonus effect pattern stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Data will be read out.

  Step S936: The effect control CPU 126 sets a challenge bonus effect pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets a challenge bonus effect pattern (for example, FIG. 47 to FIG. 49) as an active role effect executed during the big hit game. That is, it represents that a challenge bonus effect is selected as a big-game effect that is executed from the first round of the jackpot game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the effect control CPU 126 displays various images related to the challenge bonus effect pattern stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Data will be read out.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 73).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state), the first special symbol is won in the internal lottery, and the game ball is arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. After passing the certain probability variation area, it enters the battle mode (high probability time shortened state). And in battle mode (high probability time shortening state), if the result of the internal lottery of the second special symbol corresponds to the winning, a battle effect is performed in which the main character and the opponent perform a battle, and the battle effect is a victory In this case, it is a bonus with a pitch (big bonus or regular bonus), and a bonus without a pitch (a battle mode end effect is executed) when defeated by a battle effect. Here, since it is right-handed during the battle mode, basically only the internal lottery relating to the second special symbol is executed, but when the first battle mode is entered, the working memory of the first special symbol exists. In a situation where the working memory of the second special symbol is lost during the battle mode, the first special symbol may fluctuate. And if the internal lottery of the 1st special symbol corresponds to the win during the battle mode, 10 rounds of big win will be started, but the number of rounds of big hit games (5 rounds or 16 rounds) related to the 2nd special symbol, the interval between rounds Since the time and probability variation entry rate (selection ratio of the winning type in which the probability variation region is opened for a long time) is different from that related to the first special symbol, it is not possible to use a bonus effect with or without a ball. Therefore, if the first special symbol is won, the player loses the battle, executes the battle mode end effect, and makes the player recognize that there will be no bonus, and then executes the relief effect, The big hit game will be executed with the way of showing the last chance to enter the mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of discomfort with respect to being able to obtain a large number of balls even though the battle is defeated. Further, the relief bonus effect during the big hit game can change a part of the challenge bonus effect at the time of the first hit, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the effect, the production man-hours, and the like.

Next, other processes during the effect control process (step S412 in FIG. 66) will be described.
FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure for other processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S711: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect buffer clear processing. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S713.

  Step S713: The effect control CPU 126 executes a BGM selection process. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S715.

  Step S715: The effect control CPU 126 performs other processing. For example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC for the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body solenoid 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

    When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 66).

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect buffer clear process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S717: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the special symbol variation display is started. As a result of this confirmation, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S719. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation display is not started (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to other processing (FIG. 75).

  Step S719: The effect control CPU 126 clears the effect buffer. Here, the effect buffer represents a part of the storage area of the RAM 130, and data related to effects performed during the special symbol change display and stop display is stored in the storage area. For example, the contents of effects executed by each device (liquid crystal display 42, speakers 54 to 56, various lamps 46 to 52, panel lamp 53, etc.) are stored. Therefore, at the start of the special symbol variation, the storage of the production contents related to the previous special symbol variation stored in the production buffer is cleared (initialized), and the production content of this time is the above described state in the cleared state. It is stored in the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502 in FIG. 68). Then, an effect is executed in each device based on the stored contents of the effect. Note that this processing may be performed at the end of the special symbol stop display.

    When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to other processing (FIG. 75).

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of BGM selection processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S721: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the BGM can be selected. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current game mode (game state) is the battle mode (high probability time shortened state, special symbol variation time is extremely short). In the present embodiment, the state in which BGM can be selected (changed) is limited to the battle mode. Specifically, the gaming state is a state with a high probability time reduction state, or a special symbol variation display is displayed. Although it is limited to a state where the time is extremely short (for example, about 0.3 seconds), the game state may be a normal state or a low-probability short state without being limited thereto. The state where the fluctuation display is a normal time (for example, about 5 seconds) may be possible. As a result of this confirmation, if the BGM is selectable (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S723. On the other hand, if the BGM selection is not possible (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to other processing (FIG. 75).

  Step S723: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the operation is valid. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is a period during which BGM can be selected (changed). For example, the period in which the main character and the opponent are in the middle of production ((B) in FIG. 53 to (C) in FIG. 53) is a period during which BGM can be selected, The period during which the battle reach effect (such as (G) in FIG. 54 to (R) in FIG. 56) in which the opponent is fighting is being executed is a period during which BGM cannot be selected. If the result of this confirmation is that the operation is valid (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S725. On the other hand, when it is not the operation valid period (No), that is, when it is the operation invalid period, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S735.

  Step S725: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not an operation is detected. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not an operation for selecting (changing) the BGM has been performed, for example, whether or not a detection signal by pressing the cross key button 44 has been received. The BGM may be selected by pressing the effect switching button 45 or rotating the jog dial 45a. As a result of this confirmation, when an operation is detected (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S727. On the other hand, when no operation is detected (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S733.

  Step S727: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the BGM selection interface is hidden. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether an image (BGM selection interface) for selecting BGM is displayed in the liquid crystal display 42. That is, it is confirmed whether the BGM selection has not been performed so far, and the BGM selection interface is displayed for the first time by the operation of the cross key button 44 this time. As a result of the confirmation, if the BGM selection interface is not displayed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S729. On the other hand, when the BGM selection interface is not hidden (No), that is, when the BGM selection interface is already displayed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S731.

  Step S729: The effect control CPU 126 executes a BGM interface display process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 makes preparations for selecting BGM. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. When this process ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the other process (FIG. 75).

  Step S731: The effect control CPU 126 executes a BGM interface display process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of changing the BGM when there is an operation for selecting the BGM from the player. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. When this process ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the other process (FIG. 75).

  Step S733: The effect control CPU 126 executes an operation detection waiting process. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. When this process ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the other process (FIG. 75).

Step S735: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing during the operation invalid period. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 does not select the BGM interface because the period during which the battle reach effect ((G) in FIG. 54 to (R) in FIG. 56, etc.) is being executed is a period during which the BGM cannot be selected. Process to display. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to other processing (FIG. 75).

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of BGM interface display processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S741: The effect control CPU 126 loads internal information. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 loads information related to the effect currently being performed. Here, the internal information includes at least the type of BGM currently being executed, the type of BGM selected by the player, and the type of BGM that can be selected from a plurality of defined BGMs. Are stored in a part of the storage area. The internal information is stored in a storage area secured separately from the effect buffer and the BGM selection buffer, and the content of the internal information is cleared (initialized) in the effect buffer clear process (FIG. 76: step S719). ) Is never done. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S742.

  Step S742: The effect control CPU 126 executes an internal information confirmation process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming information related to BGM included in the internal information. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S743.

  Step S743: The effect control CPU 126 creates and stores BGM selection data in the BGM selection buffer. Here, the BGM selection buffer represents a partial storage area of the RAM 130, and is a storage area secured separately from the effect buffer and internal information described above. Therefore, in the effect buffer clear process (FIG. 76: step S719), the BGM selection buffer is not cleared (initialized).

  The BGM selection data represents data necessary for displaying the BGM selection interface. The BGM selection data is created from the internal information loaded above and stored in the BGM selection buffer. Specific BGM selection data includes the type of BGM currently being executed, the type of selected BGM selected by the player, the type of BGM displayed on the BGM selection interface, and the operation from the player The contents of the selection effect (scroll effect) (the type of BGM at the scroll destination, the number of scrolls, the scroll direction, the scroll time), and the like.

For example, “BGM title 1” is stored as the type of BGM currently being executed.
Also, for the type of selected BGM, the BGM selection interface is displayed for the first time, and there is no operation from the player, so the type of selected BGM is “BGM title 1” which is the type of BGM currently being executed. .

  Also, as the type of BGM to be displayed on the BGM selection interface, the types before and after the current BGM type are stored, for example, “???” in the upper row, “BGM title 1” in the middle row, and “BGM title in the lower row. Each BGM type such as “2” is stored. In the upper row, since “BGM title 8” is stored as not selectable from the internal information, the type “???” is stored.

  For example, when the upper button 44a of the cross key button 44 is pressed as the content of the selection effect (scroll effect) when there is an operation from the player, the BGM type of the scroll destination is “BGM title 5”, The number of scrolls is “4”, the scroll direction is “up”, and the scroll time is “2.8 seconds”. When the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 is pressed, the type of BGM to be scrolled is “BGM title 2”, the number of scrolls is “1”, the scroll direction is “down”, and the scroll time is “0. The contents such as “7 seconds” are stored.

  When the BGM selection data is created and stored in the BGM selection buffer, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S745.

  Step S745: The effect control CPU 126 displays a BGM selection interface. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays a BGM selection interface image in the liquid crystal display 42. For example, in the BGM selection interface image, based on the BGM selection data created above, the types of BGM (BGM title) that can be selected in the upper, interrupted, and lower levels, and the types of BGM that cannot be selected The text information such as “???” will be written. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S747.

  Step S747: The effect control CPU 126 sets a timer until the display of the BGM selection interface ends. For example, a timer of about 5 seconds is set. Therefore, after the BGM selection interface is displayed, if there is no operation from the player for 5 seconds, the BGM selection interface image is erased from the liquid crystal display 42 (or moved to the rearmost surface that cannot be seen by the player), The BGM selection interface is hidden.

    When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM selection process (FIG. 77).

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of internal information confirmation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S748: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current BGM information is the same as the selected BGM information. Specifically, for the internal information loaded in the previous process (step S741: FIG. 78), the effect control CPU 126 has the same BGM type currently being executed as the BGM type selected by the player. Check if it exists. As a result of this confirmation, when the current BGM information is the same as the selected BGM information (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S749. On the other hand, when the current BGM information is not the same as the selected BGM information (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM interface display process (FIG. 78).

  Step S749: The effect control CPU 126 changes the selected BGM information to the current BGM information. Specifically, with respect to the internal information loaded in the previous process (step S741: FIG. 78), the stored selection BGM information stored is discarded, and the confirmed current BGM information is replaced with new selection BGM information. Remember as.

  Here, the current BGM information (the type of BGM currently being executed) and the selected BGM information (the type of BGM selected by the player) included in the internal information will be described later, but are changed at different timings. Stored in internal information. For example, the current BGM information is changed when the type of BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is changed, that is, when a new BGM is reproduced and executed. On the other hand, the selected BGM information is changed when an operation (depressing the cross key button 44) by the player is performed while the BGM selection interface is being displayed. Therefore, if the BGM selection interface is hidden during the selection effect (scroll effect) on the BGM selection interface, that is, before the BGM is changed and reproduced in the determined effect, the BGM is changed with the selected BGM information changed. It may happen that it does not change.

  Therefore, when a new BGM selection interface image is displayed in this process (BGM interface display process: FIG. 78), information regarding the selection of BGM included in the internal information (BGM selection information (the BGM selected by the player) (Type)) is reset (initialized), thereby suppressing the possibility of erroneous operation regarding the selection of BGM corresponding to the player's operation (depressing the cross key button 44). Moreover, since the BGM display before selection at the time of the first operation can be performed correctly, the subsequent BGM selection effect (scroll effect) can be performed without a sense of incongruity.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM interface display process (FIG. 78).

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the BGM interface displaying process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S751: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether scrolling is stopped. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the selection effect (scroll effect) is executed in the BGM selection interface image. For example, when the BGM selection interface is displayed for the first time, scrolling is not performed, indicating that it is stopped. It should be noted that when this process was performed last time, scrolling was performed, and when the current process is performed, the scrolling is not stopped but the scrolling is ended. If the result of this confirmation is that scrolling is stopped (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S753. On the other hand, when the scroll is not stopped (No), that is, when the scroll is being performed or when the scroll is finished, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S757.

  Step S753: The effect control CPU 126 changes the BGM selection data. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes the type of the selected BGM with respect to the content of the BGM selection data stored in the BGM selection buffer. For example, when the upper button 44a of the cross key button 44 is pressed in a state where the currently executed BGM type is “BGM title 1”, the selected BGM type is changed to “BGM title 5”. In addition, when the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 is pressed in a state where the currently executed BGM type is “BGM title 1”, the selected BGM type is changed to “BGM title 2”. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S754.

  Step S754: The effect control CPU 126 changes the internal information. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes the selected BGM information (the type of BGM selected by the player) of the internal information stored in the RAM 130 to a new one. For example, when the upper button 44a of the cross key button 44 is pressed while the type of BGM currently being executed is “BGM title 1”, the selected BGM information is changed to “BGM title 5”. Further, when the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 is pressed while the type of BGM currently being executed is “BGM title 1”, the selected BGM information is changed to “BGM title 2”. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S755.

  Step S755: The effect control CPU 126 starts scrolling. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a selection effect (scroll effect) based on an operation (button pressing) from the player. Here, the contents of scrolling are performed based on the BGM selection data stored in the BGM selection buffer. Specifically, it is performed based on the content of the selection effect (scroll effect) (the type of BGM at the scroll destination, the scroll time, and the number of scrolls) when there is an operation from the player.

  For example, when the BGM title currently being executed is “BGM title 1” and the upper button 44a of the cross key button 44 is pressed, the BGM type at the end of scrolling is set to “BGM title 5” and scrolling is performed. The selection effect (scroll effect) is executed with the content that “4” is performed in the “up” direction for “2.8 seconds”. Further, when the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 is pressed while the currently executed BGM type is “BGM title 1”, the BGM type at the end of scrolling is set to “BGM title 2”, and scrolling is performed. The selection effect (scroll effect) is executed with the content that “1” is performed in the “down” direction for “0.7 seconds”.

  When an operation from the player is detected when scrolling of the BGM selection interface is stopped, processing for changing the BGM selection data and performing a scroll effect is performed. When these processes are completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM selection process (FIG. 77).

  Step S757: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the scrolling is finished. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the selection effect (scroll effect) performed in the BGM selection interface image has ended. For example, the case where scrolling is performed when this process was performed last time and the process ended when the current process is performed corresponds to this case. If the result of this confirmation is that scrolling has ended (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S759. On the other hand, if scrolling has not ended (No), that is, if scrolling is in progress, the process returns to BGM selection processing (FIG. 77).

  Therefore, even if an operation (button press) by the player is detected during scrolling, the BGM selection data is not changed, that is, the type of BGM cannot be further changed. In addition, when an operation (button press) by the player is detected at the end of scrolling, for example, when the player continues to operate from the start of scrolling (when the same button is continuously pressed) This indicates that the next process (step S759) is executed when the player operates in accordance with the end of.

  Step S759: The effect control CPU 126 executes scroll end processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process when changing the BGM. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Since the cross key button 44 (up button 44a or down button 44c) is pressed at the end of scrolling, the BGM is changed at the end of scrolling in this process. Thereafter, the above processes (steps S753 and S755) are performed. Sequentially executed, the BGM selection data is changed and a new scroll is started. Therefore, the selection effect (scroll effect) is continued. When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM selection process (FIG. 77).

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of scrolling end processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S761: The effect control CPU 126 changes the type of BGM. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes the BGM type to the selected BGM type stored in the above process (step S753). Thereby, the kind of BGM which will be output from the pachinko machine 1 will be changed. For example, when the upper button 44a of the cross key button 44 is pressed in a state where the BGM type that has been executed is “BGM title 1”, the current BGM type is changed from “BGM title 1” to “BGM title”. The title is changed to “Title 5” and is output from the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 is pressed in a state where the BGM type that has been executed is “BGM title 1”, the BGM type is changed from “BGM title 1” to “BGM title 2”. ”And output from the pachinko machine 1. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S763.

  Step S763: The effect control CPU 126 changes the internal information. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes the type of BGM currently being executed to a new one among the contents of the internal information stored in the RAM 130. For example, the type of BGM currently being executed is changed from “BGM title 1” to “BGM title 5” (when the upper button 44a of the cross key button 44 is pressed) or “BGM title 2” (of the cross key button 44). Or when the lower button 44c is pressed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S765.

  Step S765: The effect control CPU 126 changes the BGM selection data. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes the content of the BGM selection data stored in the BGM selection buffer of the RAM 130. This process is preferably performed based on the contents of the internal information changed in the above process (step S763).

For example, when the type of BGM currently being executed is changed to “BGM title 5” as the content of the internal information, “BGM title 5” is stored as the type of BGM currently being executed in the BGM selection data.
Further, the type of the selected BGM is not changed and “BGM title 5” is stored.

  In addition, as the type of BGM to be displayed on the BGM selection interface, the types before and after the current BGM type are stored. For example, “????” in the upper row, “BGM title 5” in the middle row, and “??” in the lower row. Each type of BGM such as “?” Is stored. Since “BGM title 4” is stored in the upper row and “BGM title 6” is stored in the lower row as not being selectable from the internal information, the type “???” is stored.

  Then, as the content of the selection effect (scroll effect) when there is an operation from the player, for example, when the upper button 44a of the cross key button 44 is pressed, the type of BGM of the scroll destination is “BGM title 2”, The number of scrolls is “3”, the scroll direction is “up”, and the scroll time is “2.1 seconds”. When the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 is pressed, the type of BGM to be scrolled is “BGM title 1”, the number of scrolls is “4”, the scroll direction is “down”, and the scroll time is “2. Contents such as “8 seconds” are stored.

In addition, for example, when the type of BGM currently being executed is changed to “BGM title 2” as the content of internal information, “BGM title 2” is stored as the type of BGM currently being executed in the BGM selection data. Is done.
Further, the type of the selected BGM is not changed and “BGM title 2” is stored.

  In addition, as the BGM type displayed on the BGM selection interface, the type before and after the current BGM type is stored. For example, “BGM title 1” in the upper row, “BGM title 2” in the middle row, and “??” in the lower row. Each type of BGM such as “?” Is stored. In the lower row, since “BGM title 3” is stored as not selectable from the internal information, the type “???” is stored.

  Then, as the content of the selection effect (scroll effect) when there is an operation from the player, for example, when the upper button 44a of the cross key button 44 is pressed, the type of BGM of the scroll destination is “BGM title 1”, Contents such as “1” for the number of scrolls, “up” for the scroll direction, and “0.7 seconds” for the scroll time are stored. When the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 is pressed, the type of BGM to be scrolled is “BGM title 5”, the number of scrolls is “3”, the scroll direction is “down”, and the scroll time is “2. Contents such as “1 second” are stored.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM interface displaying process (FIG. 80). This scroll end process (FIG. 81) is also used in an operation detection standby process (FIG. 82) described later, and in this case, the process returns to the operation detection standby process (FIG. 82).

  Further, when the process returns to the BGM interface display process (FIG. 80), the process of changing the BGM selection data (step S753) is executed again, so that the step separate from the operation detection standby process (FIG. 82). You may prescribe | regulate the process at the time of the scroll end combining S765 and step S753.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the operation detection waiting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S771: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the BGM selection interface is displayed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether an image (BGM selection interface) for selecting BGM is displayed in the liquid crystal display 42. As a result of this confirmation, when the BGM selection interface is displayed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S773. On the other hand, when the BGM selection interface is not displayed (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM selection process (FIG. 77).

  Step S773: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the scrolling is finished. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the selection effect (scroll effect) performed in the BGM selection interface image has ended. For example, the case where scrolling is performed when this process was performed last time and the process ended when the current process is performed corresponds to this case. If the result of this confirmation is that scrolling has ended (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S775. On the other hand, when the scrolling has not ended (No), that is, when the scrolling is being performed or when the scrolling is being stopped, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S779.

  Step S775: The effect control CPU 126 executes scroll end processing (FIG. 81). In this process, it is changed to a new BGM and output from the pachinko machine 1, or the internal information and the content of BGM selection data are changed to those corresponding to the new BGM. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S777.

  Step S777: The effect control CPU 126 sets a timer until the end of display of the BGM selection interface. For example, a timer of about 5 seconds is set. Therefore, if the player does not operate for 5 seconds after the BGM selection interface is displayed, the BGM selection interface image is erased from the liquid crystal display 42 (or moved to the back that cannot be seen by the player), and the BGM is displayed. The selection interface is hidden. The effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM selection process (FIG. 77).

  Step S779: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the scroll is stopped. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the selection effect (scroll effect) is executed in the BGM selection interface image. If the result of this confirmation is that scrolling is stopped (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S781. On the other hand, when the scroll is not stopped (No), that is, when the scroll is being performed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM selection process (FIG. 77).

  Step S781: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the timer is zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the timer set in the previous process (step S747: FIG. 78, step S777) has become 0, that is, 5 seconds have elapsed. For example, when the BGM selection interface is displayed for the first time and 5 seconds have passed without any operation from the player, or when the BGM is changed after the scrolling on the BGM selection interface is terminated by the player's operation. This corresponds to the case where 5 seconds have passed without any operation from the player. As a result of this confirmation, when the timer is 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S783. On the other hand, when the timer is not 0 (No), that is, when the state where the scroll is stopped is less than 5 seconds, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM selection process (FIG. 77).

  Step S783: The effect control CPU 126 hides the BGM selection interface. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 deletes the BGM selection interface image from the liquid crystal display 42. Alternatively, the BGM selection interface image is moved to the back side that cannot be visually recognized by the player, for example, the BGM selection interface image is moved to the back of the image where the main character and the opponent face each other ((B) in FIG. 53). When the BGM selection interface image that has been moved to the back side is displayed again, BGM selection data is created again, and the BGM selection interface image formed based on the data is displayed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S785.

  Step S785: The effect control CPU 126 clears the BGM selection buffer. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 clears (initializes) all the contents stored in the BGM selection buffer of the RAM 130. Since BGM selection data is stored in the BGM selection buffer, this indicates that all the contents of the BGM selection data are erased.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM selection process (FIG. 77).

  As described above, when 5 seconds have passed without any operation from the player after the BGM selection interface is displayed for the first time, or when there is no operation from the player after the BGM is changed by the player's operation. When elapses, the BGM selection buffer is cleared. That is, the BGM selection buffer is cleared at a timing different from that at the time of starting the special symbol variation at which the effect buffer is cleared. Therefore, even if the variation time of the special symbol is short and the BGM selection effect (scroll effect) and the decision effect straddle a plurality of variations, the BGM change effect can be executed without a sense of incongruity. In addition, regardless of only the BGM change, a dedicated buffer different from the effect buffer is similarly secured in the RAM 130 for the effect related to the game environment setting change such as the volume and brightness output from the pachinko machine 1. Even if the change of the number of times is straddled, by not clearing the buffer every time the change of the special symbol starts, the effect related to the setting change can be displayed without a sense of incongruity. In addition, regardless of the BGM change or the game environment setting change, the present invention can be applied to effects over multiple variations, and can be displayed without a sense of incongruity.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of processing during an invalid operation period. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S791: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the BGM selection interface is displayed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether an image (BGM selection interface) for selecting BGM is displayed in the liquid crystal display 42. As a result of this confirmation, when the BGM selection interface is displayed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S793. On the other hand, when the BGM selection interface is not displayed (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM selection process (FIG. 77).

  Step S793: The effect control CPU 126 hides the BGM selection interface. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 deletes the BGM selection interface image from the liquid crystal display 42. Alternatively, the BGM selection interface image is moved to the back that cannot be seen by the player, for example, the BGM selection interface image is moved to the back of the image in which the opponent is chasing the hero ((E) in FIG. 64). When the BGM selection interface image that has been moved to the back side is displayed again, BGM selection data is created again, and the BGM selection interface image formed based on the data is displayed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S795.

  Step S795: The effect control CPU 126 clears the BGM selection buffer. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 clears (initializes) all the contents stored in the BGM selection buffer of the RAM 130. Since BGM selection data is stored in the BGM selection buffer, this indicates that all the contents of the BGM selection data are erased.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the BGM selection process (FIG. 77).

  As described above, in the period in which the operation from the player for selecting the BGM is invalidated, the BGM selection interface is not displayed, and the BGM selection buffer is also cleared. For example, when a special symbol change time is performed over a long period of time and a reach effect (battle reach effect) is started, the BGM selection interface is hidden. This is whether the result of reach production is a big hit, whether it is a big win that will be beneficial to the player (battle mode continues) or disadvantageous (battle mode ends) This is because the degree of interest of the player is higher than the selection of BGM. Therefore, by hiding an image related to BGM selection (BGM selection interface), a decrease in the interest of the player in the game is suppressed.

  In this process, since the BGM selection buffer is cleared, the content of the BGM selection data (type of selected BGM) that was last operated by the player is deleted. On the other hand, since the internal information is not cleared, the content of the last operation is maintained as it is for the selected BGM information included in the internal information. However, when a new BGM is selected (when the BGM selection interface is displayed), internal information confirmation processing (FIG. 79) is performed, and information regarding the selection of BGM included in the internal information (BGM selection information) (BGM type selected by the player)) is reset (initialized). Therefore, the possibility of malfunction regarding the selection of BGM corresponding to the player's next operation (depressing the cross key button 44) is suppressed. Thereby, since the BGM display before selection at the time of the first operation can be performed correctly, the subsequent BGM selection effect (scroll effect) can be performed without a sense of incongruity.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of a time chart when BGM is selected. In the figure, (A) special symbol, (B) BGM selection interface, and (C) playback BGM (title) are shown in time series. Specifically, in the upper part of the figure, (A) shows the behavior of the special symbol. “Change” is displayed during the variable display period, and “Stop” is displayed during the stop display (definite stop display). It is written as “Confirmed”. Also, the middle stage shows the contents of the effect performed in (B) BGM selection interface. In the lower row, (C) the type of BGM (title) being reproduced output from the pachinko machine 1 is shown. Hereinafter, the contents will be described in time series. In addition, although the game mode (game state) demonstrated assumes the battle mode (high probability time shortening state, the state in which the change time of a special symbol is very short), it is not limited to this, Normal mode (Normal If the BGM can be selected in (Status), it can be adapted.

  Time T0: For example, when the stop display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is finished and the next special symbol can be changed and displayed, the effect buffer of the RAM 130 is cleared (initialized), The effect performed in conjunction with the special symbol variation display to be performed is stored in the effect buffer in which the effect is cleared. Then, the special symbol variation display is performed for 0.3 seconds (until time T2). At this time, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 outputs a type of BGM such as BGM (title 1).

  Time T1: It is assumed that the player performs a button operation (pressing the upper button 44a or the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44, etc.) during the special symbol variation display. When the button operation is detected, a new BGM selection interface image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 42.

  At this time, BGM selection data used for selecting a BGM is created based on the type of BGM currently being executed (BGM (title 1)), and a BGM selection interface image is displayed based on the BGM selection data. Is done. The BGM selection data is stored in a BGM selection buffer secured in the RAM 130 separately from the effect buffer.

  For example, the current BGM is displayed in the middle of the BGM selection interface image, and specifically, BGM (title 1) is displayed. In addition, different BGM types are also displayed in the upper and lower stages in the BGM selection interface image. For example, BGM of a type such as “???” in the upper stage and “BGM (title 5)” in the lower stage is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is not changed, and BGM (title 1) is continuously output.

  Time T2: When a very short fluctuation display such as 0.3 seconds of a special symbol is completed, stop display (definite stop display) is performed for 0.5 seconds (until time T3).

  Time T3: When the special symbol stop display for 0.5 seconds is completed and the next special symbol variable display can be executed, the effect buffer is cleared (initialized). Then, the variation display of the next special symbol is performed for 0.3 seconds (until time T5). At this time, the BGM selection buffer is not cleared at the same time as the effect buffer.

  Time T4: Assume a case where a button operation (pressing the upper button 44a or the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44, etc.) is performed by the player during the special symbol variation display. When the button operation is detected, a selection effect (scroll) is started in the BGM selection interface image.

  For example, it is assumed that the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 is pressed. The scroll effect is performed based on the BGM selection data. In this case, the type of BGM of the scroll destination is “BGM title 2”, the number of scrolls is “1”, the scroll direction is “down”, and the scroll time is “0”. .7 seconds "will be performed. Therefore, scrolling is performed for 0 to 7 seconds (until time T7). At this time, the BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is not changed, and BGM (title 1) is continuously output.

  Time T5: When a very short time variation display such as 0.3 seconds of a special symbol is completed, stop display (definite stop display) is performed for 0.5 seconds (until time T6).

  Time T6: Then, when the stop display of the special symbol for 0.5 seconds is completed and the next special symbol can be changed and displayed, the effect buffer is cleared (initialized). Then, the variation display of the next special symbol is performed for 0.3 seconds (until time T8). At this time, the BGM selection buffer is not cleared at the same time as the effect buffer.

  Time T7: The selection effect (scrolling) performed in the BGM selection interface image during the special symbol variation display ends. For example, in the BGM selection interface image, BGM of the type “BGM (title 1)”, “BGM (title 2)” in the middle, and “???” in the bottom are displayed and stopped.

  When the scroll in the BGM selection interface image is completed, the BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is changed from BGM (title 1) to BGM (title 2). In addition, when the type of BGM is changed, the BGM selection data stored in the BGM selection buffer is also changed.

  Further, an operation from the player (pressing the upper button 44a or the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44) is not detected until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (until time T12) elapses from this time T7. Assuming that

  Time T8: When a very short variation display such as 0.3 seconds of a special symbol is completed, stop display (definite stop display) is performed for 0.5 seconds (until time T9).

  Time T9: When the special symbol stop display for 0.5 seconds is finished and the next special symbol variation display can be executed, the effect buffer is cleared (initialized). Then, the next special symbol variation display is performed for 0.3 seconds (until not shown). At this time, the BGM selection buffer is not cleared at the same time as the effect buffer.

  Time T10: After a certain amount of time has elapsed, a special symbol is displayed in a plurality of times, and when another symbol is stopped for 0.5 seconds, the next special symbol can be displayed. The production buffer is cleared (initialized). Then, the next special symbol variation display is performed for 0.3 seconds (until T11). At this time, the BGM selection buffer is not cleared at the same time as the effect buffer.

  Time T11: When a very short variation display such as 0.3 seconds of a special symbol is completed, a stop display (determined stop display) for 0.5 seconds (not shown) is performed next.

  Time T12: The BGM selection interface image is not displayed from the liquid crystal display 42 during the special symbol stop display. This is based on the absence of an operation for selecting a BGM from the player for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the BGM was changed (time T7). At this time, the BGM selection buffer is cleared, that is, the BGM selection data is erased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the BGM selection buffer is cleared at a timing different from that at the time of starting the change of the special symbol when the effect buffer is cleared. Therefore, even if the variation time of the special symbol is short and the BGM selection effect (scroll effect) and the decision effect straddle a plurality of variations, the BGM change effect can be executed without a sense of incongruity. In addition, regardless of only the BGM change, a dedicated buffer different from the effect buffer is similarly secured in the RAM 130 for the effect related to the game environment setting change such as the volume and brightness output from the pachinko machine 1. Even if the change of the number of times is straddled, by not clearing the buffer every time the change of the special symbol starts, the effect related to the setting change can be displayed without a sense of incongruity. In addition, regardless of the BGM change or the game environment setting change, the present invention can be applied to effects over multiple variations, and can be displayed without a sense of incongruity.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a time chart when BGM is selected. FIG. 84 shows an example in which the special symbol variation display is performed over a normal variation time (for example, 0.3 seconds), whereas FIG. 85 shows the special symbol variation display for a long time (for example, 9 seconds). ). In the drawing, as in FIG. 84, (A) special symbols, (B) BGM selection interface, and (C) playback BGM (title) are shown in time series. Hereinafter, the contents will be described in time series. In addition, although the game mode (game state) demonstrated assumes the battle mode (high probability time shortening state, the state in which the change time of a special symbol is very short), it is not limited to this, Normal mode (Normal If the BGM can be selected in (Status), it can be adapted.

  Time T20: For example, when the stop display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is finished and the variation display of the next special symbol becomes executable, the effect buffer of the RAM 130 is cleared (initialized), The effect performed in conjunction with the special symbol variation display to be performed is stored in the effect buffer in which the effect is cleared. Then, the special symbol variation display is performed for 0.3 seconds (until time T22). At this time, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 outputs a type of BGM such as BGM (title 1).

  Time T21: It is assumed that a button operation (pressing the upper button 44a or the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44) is performed by the player during the special symbol variation display. When the button operation is detected, a new BGM selection interface image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 42.

  At this time, BGM selection data used for selecting a BGM is created based on the type of BGM currently being executed (BGM (title 1)), and a BGM selection interface image is displayed based on the BGM selection data. Is done. The BGM selection data is stored in a BGM selection buffer secured in the RAM 130 separately from the effect buffer.

  For example, the current BGM is displayed in the middle of the BGM selection interface image, and specifically, BGM (title 1) is displayed. In addition, different BGM types are also displayed in the upper and lower stages in the BGM selection interface image. For example, BGM of the type “???” in the upper part and “BGM (title 2)” in the lower part is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is not changed, and BGM (title 1) is continuously output.

  Time T22: When a very short variation display such as 0.3 seconds of a special symbol is completed, stop display (definite stop display) is performed for 0.5 seconds (until time T23).

  Time T23: When the special symbol stop display for 0.5 seconds is completed and the next special symbol variable display can be executed, the effect buffer is cleared (initialized). Then, the next special symbol variation display is performed for 0.3 seconds (until time T25). At this time, the BGM selection buffer is not cleared at the same time as the effect buffer.

  Time T24: Assume a case where a button operation by the player (pressing of the upper button 44a or the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44, etc.) is performed during the special symbol variation display. When the button operation is detected, a selection effect (scroll) is started in the BGM selection interface image.

  For example, it is assumed that the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44 is pressed. The scroll effect is performed based on the BGM selection data. In this case, the type of BGM of the scroll destination is “BGM title 2”, the number of scrolls is “1”, the scroll direction is “down”, and the scroll time is “0”. .7 seconds "will be performed. Therefore, scrolling is performed for 0 to 7 seconds (until time T28). At this time, the BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is not changed, and BGM (title 1) is continuously output.

  At this time T24, the contents of the internal information are also changed. Specifically, the selected BGM information included in the internal information (the type of BGM selected by the player) is changed based on an operation by the player. For example, the selected BGM information is changed to “BGM title 2”.

  Time T25: When a very short variation display such as 0.3 seconds of a special symbol is completed, stop display (definite stop display) is performed for 0.5 seconds (until time T26).

  Time T26: Then, when the stop display of the special symbol for 0.5 seconds is completed and the next special symbol can be changed and displayed, the effect buffer is cleared (initialized). Then, the next special symbol variation display is performed for 9 seconds (until time T29) which is longer than usual. At this time, the BGM selection buffer is not cleared at the same time as the effect buffer.

  Time T27: When a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the special symbol length change (for example, about 1.5 seconds), an effect that depends on the execution of the big hit game is started in the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, FIG. 65 (E)). In addition, a period (operation invalid period) in which the operation of selecting the BGM by the player is invalidated at the same time as the start of the effect (1.5 seconds after the start of the change). Further, the BGM selection interface is not displayed at the same time as the start of the operation invalid period. Further, along with the non-display of the BGM selection interface, the BGM selection buffer is cleared, that is, the BGM selection data is deleted.

  At this time, the content of the internal information is not changed. Therefore, the selected BGM information (the type of BGM selected by the player) included in the internal information is not changed, and for example, the selected BGM information is maintained as “BGM title 2”. At this time, the BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is not changed, and BGM (title 1) is continuously output.

  Time T28: If the special symbol length change is not executed, the scroll effect on the BGM selection interface is terminated. Since the BGM selection interface is not displayed due to the length change, the determined effect (scrolling is stopped). It will not be executed, and BGM will not be changed. Accordingly, the BGM output from the pachinko machine 1 is not changed, and BGM (title 1) is continuously output.

  Time T29: When the variable display longer than normal, such as 9 seconds of the special symbol, is finished, stop display (definite stop display) is performed for 0.5 seconds (until time T30).

  Time T30: Then, when the stop display of the special symbol for 0.5 seconds is completed and the next special symbol can be changed and displayed, the effect buffer is cleared (initialized). Then, the next special symbol variation display is performed for 0.3 seconds (until time T32). At this time, the BGM selection buffer is not cleared at the same time as the effect buffer.

  Time T31: It is assumed that the player performs a button operation (pressing the upper button 44a or the lower button 44c of the cross key button 44, etc.) during the special symbol variation display. When the button operation is detected, a new BGM selection interface image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 42.

  At this time, BGM selection data used for selecting a BGM is created based on the type of BGM currently being executed (BGM (title 1)), and a BGM selection interface image is displayed based on the BGM selection data. Is done.

  Before this button operation is performed, the selected BGM information included in the internal information is the type of BGM that was selected by the player last time (for example, “BGM title 2”), and the type of BGM currently being executed. Was different. However, with this button operation, the selection BGM information of the internal information is changed and changed to the type of BGM currently being executed (for example, “BGM title 1”). Therefore, the possibility of malfunction regarding the selection of BGM corresponding to the player's next operation (depressing the cross key button 44) is suppressed. Thereby, since the BGM display before selection at the time of the first operation can be performed correctly, the subsequent BGM selection effect (scroll effect) can be performed without a sense of incongruity.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In the embodiment described above, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 have been described as examples in which they are arranged in the right-handed region, but they may be arranged in the left-handed region.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (4)

Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game;
When the predetermined lottery is executed, the symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery after the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time triggered by this,
After executing a variation display effect for variably displaying a plurality of effect symbols in correspondence with the symbol variation display each time by the symbol display means, a plurality of combinations are provided corresponding to the stop display of the symbol for which the variation display has ended. Effect design effect execution means for executing a result display effect to stop and display the effect symbol;
A background effect executing means for executing a background effect different from the effect by the effect symbol effect executing means across a plurality of symbol change display and stop display executed by the symbol display means;
A background effect type selecting means that allows the background effect executed by the background effect executing means to be selected from a plurality of types that are defined in advance based on reception of an operation input;
Displaying background effect selection information related to the selection of the plurality of types of background effects, triggered by the fact that the operation input has been received by the background effect type selecting means during the display or change display of the symbols by the symbol display means. Background effect information display means;
When a predetermined standby time has elapsed after the operation input is received by the background effect type selection means while the background effect selection information is displayed, the background effect selection information is selected according to the received operation input. Background effect change control means for controlling the background effect to be executed by the background effect execution means by changing to the type of background effect;
Current effect information indicating the type of background effect currently being executed by the background effect execution means, and a selection effect indicating the type of background effect selected in response to the operation input by the background effect type selection means Internal information storage means for storing internal information including at least information;
Regarding the internal information stored by the internal information storage unit, when the type of the background effect executed by the background effect execution unit is changed, the current effect information is updated to the changed type of the background effect. On the other hand, an internal information storage updating means for updating the selected effect information to the type of the background effect that is scheduled to be changed when the operation input that has triggered the change of the type of the background effect is received.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:   In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
  When the operation input by the background effect type selection means is received in a state where the background effect selection information is not displayed, the current information stored in the internal information stored by the internal information storage means is stored. Internal information storage change means for changing the selected effect information to the current effect information when the effect information is different from the selected effect information
A gaming machine, further comprising:   The gaming machine according to claim 2,
  When the display of the background effect selection information is hidden before the standby time by the background effect change control means has elapsed, the internal information updated by the internal information storage update means is maintained, Background effect change control stopping means for stopping control of changing the background effect by the background effect change control means
A gaming machine, further comprising: In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3 ,
Effect content storage means for storing the contents of the fluctuation display effect and the result display effect executed by the effect symbol effect execution means;
Background effect selection information content storage means for storing the content of the background effect selection information displayed by the background effect information display means;
For the effect design effect execution means, the variable display effect and the result display effect are executed based on the effect contents stored by the effect content storage means, and the background effect selection information for the background effect information display means. Effect control means for performing control to execute display of the background effect selection information based on the content stored by the content storage means;
When the predetermined lottery is executed, when the variable display effect is started by the effect symbol effect executing means, the variable display effect and the result display effect stored by the effect content storage means are started. The background effect selection information is displayed by the background effect information display unit when the operation input is received by the background effect type selection unit while the background effect selection information is not displayed. And a storage update means for updating the content of the background effect selection information stored in the background effect selection information content storage means.